false213800KCP1IDX51ZHE472024-08-012025-07-31iso4217:GBP213800KCP1IDX51ZHE472023-08-012024-07-31iso4217:GBPxbrli:shares213800KCP1IDX51ZHE472025-07-31213800KCP1IDX51ZHE472024-07-31213800KCP1IDX51ZHE472023-07-31ifrs-full:IssuedCapitalMember213800KCP1IDX51ZHE472023-07-31ifrs-full:ReserveOfSharebasedPaymentsMember213800KCP1IDX51ZHE472023-07-31ifrs-full:ReserveOfExchangeDifferencesOnTranslationMember213800KCP1IDX51ZHE472023-07-31ifrs-full:RetainedEarningsMember213800KCP1IDX51ZHE472023-07-31213800KCP1IDX51ZHE472023-08-012024-07-31ifrs-full:IssuedCapitalMember213800KCP1IDX51ZHE472023-08-012024-07-31ifrs-full:ReserveOfSharebasedPaymentsMember213800KCP1IDX51ZHE472023-08-012024-07-31ifrs-full:ReserveOfExchangeDifferencesOnTranslationMember213800KCP1IDX51ZHE472023-08-012024-07-31ifrs-full:RetainedEarningsMember213800KCP1IDX51ZHE472024-07-31ifrs-full:IssuedCapitalMember213800KCP1IDX51ZHE472024-07-31ifrs-full:ReserveOfSharebasedPaymentsMember213800KCP1IDX51ZHE472024-07-31ifrs-full:ReserveOfExchangeDifferencesOnTranslationMember213800KCP1IDX51ZHE472024-07-31ifrs-full:RetainedEarningsMember213800KCP1IDX51ZHE472024-08-012025-07-31ifrs-full:IssuedCapitalMember213800KCP1IDX51ZHE472024-08-012025-07-31ifrs-full:ReserveOfSharebasedPaymentsMember213800KCP1IDX51ZHE472024-08-012025-07-31ifrs-full:ReserveOfExchangeDifferencesOnTranslationMember213800KCP1IDX51ZHE472024-08-012025-07-31ifrs-full:RetainedEarningsMember213800KCP1IDX51ZHE472025-07-31ifrs-full:IssuedCapitalMember213800KCP1IDX51ZHE472025-07-31ifrs-full:ReserveOfSharebasedPaymentsMember213800KCP1IDX51ZHE472025-07-31ifrs-full:ReserveOfExchangeDifferencesOnTranslationMember213800KCP1IDX51ZHE472025-07-31ifrs-full:RetainedEarningsMember091317492024-08-012025-07-3109131749bus:Director12024-08-012025-07-3109131749bus:Consolidated2025-07-3109131749bus:Consolidated2024-08-012025-07-3109131749bus:Director22024-08-012025-07-31091317492025-07-31xbrli:pure09131749bus:Audited2024-08-012025-07-3109131749bus:Director1bus:Consolidated2024-08-012025-07-3109131749bus:FullIFRS2024-08-012025-07-3109131749bus:FullAccounts2024-08-012025-07-31
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
INNOVATE.
DELIVER.
SCALE.
OUR VISION
TO BECOME THE WORLD’S
MOST TRUSTED AND
INNOVATIVE SPORTS
NUTRITION, HEALTH
AND WELLNESS BRAND.
WHO WE ARE
OUR PURPOSE
HIGHLIGHTS
Applied Nutrition is a leading sports nutrition,
health and wellness brand, which formulates
and creates nutrition products targeted at
a wide range of consumers and sold in over
85countries worldwide.
We develop innovative supplements,
establishing a widely available range of
trusted products that meets the evolving
needs of a growing global market.
Backed by industry-leading in-house R&D,
ourtesting and manufacturing standards
setus apart from the competition and reflect
our passion for innovation.
We Fuel Your Moment™
Whether that’s to
Fuel your healthier lifestyle,
Fuel your workout or
Fuel your elite level performance,
We’re here to Fuel Your Moment.
FY25 revenue
£107.1M
FY24: £86.2M (+24.2%)
FY25 adjusted EBITDA
1
£30.9M
FY24: £26.0M (+18.7%)
Operating profit
£28.1M
FY24: £23.7M (+18.6%)
FY25 free cash flow
1
£16.5M
FY24: £7.1M (+132.4%)
Global market expected to grow by
2
8.1%
Expected CAGR to 2028
Global market opportunity
2
£279BN
Forecast value in 2028
STRATEGIC REPORT
Highlights 1
Introducing Applied Nutrition plc 2
Q&A with Thomas Ryder, Chief Executive 4
Chair's statement 6
Chief Executive Officer's review 8
Investment case 12
Our business model and strategy 14
Strategic growth 16
Sustainability 18
Task Force on Climate‑related
Financial Disclosures 24
Stakeholder engagement and s172 32
Group financial review 38
Risk management 42
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE
Governance at a glance 50
Board of Directors 52
Corporate governance report 55
Nomination Committee report 60
Audit and Risk Committee report 63
Remuneration Committee report 66
Directors’ report 82
Statement of Directors’ responsibilities 85
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
Independent auditors’ report 86
Group financial statements 94
Notes to the Group financial statements 98
Parent company financial statements 123
Notes to the parent company
financial statements 125
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
Glossary 134
Professional advisers 135
Alternative performance measures 136
1. Please see pages 39 and 41 for calculations.
2. Euromonitor International Consumer Health Passport 2024 Edition.
1
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
INTRODUCING
APPLIED
NUTRITION
PLC
LOCAL PRIDE
UK company – from a shop in Liverpool in 2014 to an IPO on
the London Stock Exchange in 2024
Predominantly UK manufacturing – in‑house in Knowsley
GLOBAL FOOTPRINT
Global sales presence
Complementary US presence
Leveraging local marketing expertise
globally through distributors
250+
Locally created jobs
85+
Sold in over 85 countries
FUTURE AMBITIONS
Our vision is to be the world’s most trusted and innovative
sports nutrition, health and wellness brand.
We’re a UK company and are proud to be a home‑grown
brandnow selling all over the world.
WITH SOLID PROGRESS BEHIND US
AND ENCOURAGING TRADING TRENDS
CONTINUING, WE ARE FOCUSED ON
KEY OPPORTUNITIES WITH A VIEW
TO CONTINUING OUR AMBITION TO
BECOME THE WORLD’S MOST TRUSTED
AND INNOVATIVE SPORTS NUTRITION,
HEALTH AND WELLNESS BRAND.
Thomas Ryder
Founder and CEO of Applied Nutrition
2
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
OUR RANGES
We have developed four product ranges which target a wide
range of consumers: professional athletes who use sports
nutrition products daily, serious gym‑goers, fitness enthusiasts,
and everyday health‑conscious consumers looking to improve
their health or manage their weight.
Each range targets a different consumer group and ensures
that the Group continues to appeal to a broad and diversified
customer base.
PERFORMANCE
& ELITE ATHLETE
Professional athletes
who use sports nutrition
products daily
SERIOUS
GYM-GOER
Serious gym‑goers with
the goal to improve
performance
FITNESS
ENTHUSIASTS
Exercise regularly
and require full range
of sports nutrition
products
HEALTH
CONSCIOUS
Everyday consumers
looking to improve
theirhealth and manage
their vitality
APPLIED NUTRITION
Our original range which comprises our broadest
product offering
60%
Revenue
ALL BLACK EVERYTHING (ABE)
A highly formulated premium range targeted at
serious gym‑goers
24%
Revenue
BODYFUEL
An entry‑level range aimed at the consumer who is
price conscious or starting their supplement journey
8%
Revenue
ENDURANCE
A specialist range aimed at enduranceathletes
2%
Revenue
Note: The additional 6% of revenue is derived from products manufactured on behalf of third parties.
3
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
Q&A
WITH
THOMAS RYDER,
CHIEF EXECUTIVE
OUR
HISTORY
2014
Formed, launching
with Critical Mass
product
2016
Launched
ABErange
2017
Products sold in
15 countries and
entry into the
Middle East with
Dr Nutrition
2018
Range grows to
>30 products
First grab‑and‑go
products launched
2015
Received Informed
Sport certification
In‑house NPD and
manufacturing
established
Entry into Europe
OUR VISION IS TO
BECOME THE WORLD’S
MOST INNOVATIVE
AND TRUSTED SPORTS
NUTRITION, HEALTH
AND WELLNESS BRAND,
AND BEING LISTED
GIVES YOU THAT
ADDEDCREDIBILITY.
APPLIED NUTRITION’S STORY SO FAR
Q.
Why and how did you get into
supplements and nutrition?
A. Supplements and nutrition have been
my life since I left school. They are
probably boring to 99% of people, but I
absolutely love it. I love the ingredients,
I love researching what dosages of what
ingredients are good and what benefits
that you get from them, and it just grew
from there.
I opened up a small supplements store,
called BodyFuel, when I was 18 and
we stocked lots of different brands and
products. At this time, I was still working
another job though. I started wholesaling
a bit, selling products on.
Back in those days, sports nutrition
products were mainly used by
bodybuilders. I wasn’t really interested
in that, but I always thought there was
awider market for sports nutrition.
Q.
What happened next to start
Applied Nutrition?
A. I started Applied Nutrition in 2014.
Atthe time it was already a small brand
I was stocking, but it was in decline.
Critical Mass was their main product
but I believed it was marketed wrong.
Itook over the brand and started fresh,
knuckled down with rebranding and
redevelopment, moved production
to a new manufacturer in Belgium
and worked with them on product
development.
4
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
2019
International
growth stretches
into APAC
2020
Moved to the new
HQ in Knowsley,
with 44k sq. ft.
capacity
2021
JD Sports
acquired 32%
stake in the
Company
2022
Launched in
theUS
Addition of second
UK warehouse
(47k sq. ft.)
Launched the
range focused on
endurance sports
community, such as
running, cycling
and swimming
2023
Collaborated with
Swizzels and
Millions
Launched into
Walmart in US
Introduced
automation within
manufacturing
facility
2024
Company
celebrated its 10th
anniversary and
underwent an IPO
on the London
Stock Exchange
US CEO Aaron
Heidebreicht
recruited
Launched with
several UK grocers
Expansion of
manufacturing
capacity
SCAN ME!
Watch Thomas’s story on
the LSE website.
I was learning on the job. In early 2016,
we made the decision to put in our own
manufacturing facility as the pound was
dropping against the euro, and we were
being caught out on the exchange rate.
We made room for manufacturing in
my warehouse, and these were my first
employees. The most pivotal point in
our journey was bringing manufacturing
in‑house. That was the game changer for
us. It allowed us to be in control of our
destiny, our product range and what we
put out to the end consumer.
This taught me how to take a product
to market. It gave me a lot of insight.
In those days we were mainly selling
through the speciality stores I had a
relationship with. It grew organically.
We didn’t have a lot of money, and
everything went back into product
development.
The rest is history!
Q.
Why did you choose to IPO?
A. Over the years, we looked at our
options. Private equity and trade were
interested, but after taking advice from
numerous experienced people, we felt
the IPO route was the best option for us.
I love working in the business and the
IPO allowed us to keep control of our
own destiny. Other companies in our
industry that are listed seemed to be in a
different league. Our vision is to become
the world’s most innovative and trusted
sports nutrition, health and wellness
brand, and being listed gives you that
added credibility. Ringing the bell was a
massive moment for us, a real milestone.
FIND OUT MORE PAGE 8
Q.
Which products do you use?
A. I use a range of products based
upon general health and wellness
and performance. My everyday
non‑negotiables are Collagen, Critical
Whey Protein and Greens Powder.
Ondays that I exercise, I also take ABE.
Q.
Supplements and nutrition are now
part of everyday life aren’t they?
A. Yes, the general public is a lot
more aware and conscious. There is
an understanding that it is not just
for bodybuilders, but now health and
wellness is for everyone and, as a
result, our products cater to all types
ofconsumers.
Q.
This isn’t just focused on the male
demographic anymore is it?
A. Not at all. One of the biggest trends
we’ve seen across our business is
the increase in women wanting to be
healthy, fit and strong. Two years ago
we were still male dominated, but the
number of female customers has now
increased from 20% to 40%. Broadening
our product range to include things
likeCollagen has helped us tap into
thismarket.
Q.
This all sounds incredibly
excitingwith more and more
peoplefocusing on this lifestyle.
What excites you for the future?
A. We are incredibly excited for the
future. Whilst we have had success, we
have only scratched the surface of what
we can achieve. The market is growing
extremely quickly and we are focused
on taking our brand and products to
more customers across the globe, whilst
expanding our offering with existing
customers.
FIND OUT MORE PAGE 8
5
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
A year of delivery following our
successful IPO with growth across both
existing and new customers, supported
by a continuous focus on new product
development.
I am delighted to be reporting on
our maiden results following our
IPO in October 2024. The successful
IPO represented the next step
in Applied Nutrition’s journey to
becoming the world’s most trusted
and innovative sports nutrition, health
andwellnessbrand.
The IPO enabled us to welcome new
shareholders as we pursue significant
opportunities in growing end markets.
This builds on a track record of consistent
execution and impressive growth.
The Group’s strong performance in
the period has been driven by growth
across both existing and new customers,
supported by a continuous focus on new
product development (NPD).
Our growth strategy is centred around
existing customers through increasing
shelf space and increasing distribution
end points whilst winning new customers
in new geographies and channels. The
successful execution of our strategy has
delivered a FY25 performance ahead of
market expectations.
Our people and the culture we have
built lie at the heart of Applied Nutrition.
With a team of over 270 passionate and
committed individuals, we continue to
build on our strong culture and deliver
results. I would like to thank them for
their hard work and dedication; without
their efforts our results would not be
possible. Alongside this, we have a Board
that has significant experience in both
retail and capital markets to ensure
that there is appropriate guidance and
oversight.
As a Board, we recognise that effective
governance is vital for maintaining trust
in our ability to deliver long‑term value
for shareholders.
Since IPO we have continued to build
on our established robust governance
framework that facilitates and supports
the Company’s growth ambitions,
underpinned by strong risk management
and independent oversight.
Looking ahead, FY26 has continued in the
same strong vein as FY25.
We look forward to bringing all
stakeholders on the journey with us as
we take advantage of the opportunities
togrow with new and existing customers,
whilst bringing innovative new products
to market.
Andy Bell
Independent Non‑Executive Chair
7 November 2025
DELIVERING ON
OUR PROMISES
Andy Bell
Independent Non-Executive Chair
CHAIR’S
STATEMENT
INTRODUCING OUR BOARD
In our first corporate governance
report, we outline how the
Directors contribute to the delivery
of our strategy through high
standards of corporate governance,
approaching the Corporate
Governance Code with a comply
orexplain approach.
READ MORE IN CORPORATE GOVERNANCE
SEE PAGE 55
Corporate Governance
Code 2024
Board leadership and
companypurpose
Division of responsibilities
Composition, succession
andevaluation
Audit, risk and internal control
Remuneration
6
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
WE ARE CONFIDENT OUR IPO
IN OCTOBER 2024 HAS
ALREADY DELIVERED THE
INCREASE IN PROFILE,
AWARENESS AND
CREDIBILITY WE HAD
ANTICIPATED.
Thomas Ryder
Founder and CEO of Applied Nutrition
YEAR IN REVIEW
Key
1. Coffee & Vibes event
2. Northwest Business of the Year Awards
2025 – Fast Growth Award
3. Our manufacturing facility
4. Manchester half marathon sponsor
5. Dubai Muscle Show with NPD cherry
proteinwater
6. Endurance collaboration with Vimto
7. Our global distribution centre
6
7
2
5
43
1
7
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
Introduction and overview
Our first year as a listed company on
the Main Market of the London Stock
Exchange has once again demonstrated
our ability to deliver, with a year of
continued momentum and opportunity.
We are pleased strong trading has
enabled us to deliver full‑year results
ahead of initial market expectations,
with performance having been driven by
the successful execution of our growth
strategy. We are also confident our IPO
in October 2024 has already delivered
the increase in profile, awareness and
credibility we had anticipated.
Our business‑to‑business (B2B) model
remains our chosen route to market
which enables a low‑risk, highly
cost‑effective go‑to‑market strategy
which has allowed us to leverage local
knowledge in international markets.
Additionally, ourdirect‑to‑consumer
channel, thoughasmaller component
of the Group, continues to deliver
complementary growth.
Our vision to become the world’s most
trusted and innovative sports nutrition,
health and wellness brand continues
to fuel our ambition, and this year has
further demonstrated both the scale of
the opportunity that lies ahead and our
ability to deliver against it.
Market and opportunity
Since founding the business in 2014,
thesports nutrition, health and wellness
market has changed dramatically.
WhenIstarted in the industry,
supplements were thought of just for
bodybuilders, but now consumers
across all demographics are becoming
ever‑increasingly health conscious.
Health and wellness is for everyone
and, as a result, our products cater
to all types of consumers, from elite
performers to everyday consumers
looking to make more health‑conscious
decisions.
Our opportunity is presently underpinned
by the industry’s strong growth
projections. The global sports nutrition,
health and wellness market is projected
to grow to £279 billion by the end of 2028
at a CAGR of c.8%
1
.
EVERYTHING WE DO IS TO RESONATE TRUST
WITH THE END CONSUMER AND BEING A LISTED
BUSINESS DRIVES THAT MESSAGE.
INTRODUCTION
FROM THOMAS RYDER,
CHIEF EXECUTIVE
Thomas Ryder
Founder and CEO of Applied Nutrition
CHIEF
EXECUTIVE
OFFICER’S
REVIEW
1. Euromonitor International Consumer Health
Passport 2024 Edition.
8
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
Recent consumer research reinforces
the structural tailwinds across the sports
nutrition, health and wellness market.
In a survey we conducted of 2,000 UK
consumers aged 18‑65, health and
wellness emerged as the second‑highest
personal priority, marginally behind
family, emphasising the increasing
societal focus on everyday wellbeing.
Building on this, 64% said that they had
reduced spending on social activities
to invest in their health over the last
twelve months. Notably, over 80% of
respondents now view supplements as
a necessity rather than a luxury, with
protein, vitamins, creatine, pre‑workout,
hydration and recovery products proving
the most popular offerings for survey
respondents. These trends in consumer
behaviour align directly with Applied
Nutrition’s focus on delivering trusted,
high‑quality products that support
healthier lifestyles and sustained
wellbeing as part of daily routines.
Sports nutrition and health and wellness
products are increasingly becoming
a mainstay on retailer websites and
shelves globally and these supportive
market dynamics provide us with strong
confidence for the future success of the
Group. While we remain a relatively
small player in the global market,
our constant innovation, growth and
expanding distribution provides a clear
platform to continue taking share in our
growing markets.
Performance review
FY25 performance was ahead of market
expectations as we grew revenues by
c.24% and adjusted EBITDA by c.19%
with profit before tax increasing by
c.17%. Wewant to thank our partners,
customers and staff in helping us
achievethis. Notwithstanding the
additional costs of being a listed
business, we have delivered the same
underlying profit margins as in FY24.
FY25 has seen us once again deliver
against our multi‑pillar, global growth
strategy: deepening relationships with
existing customers through increased
shelf space and distribution end points
as well as securing new customers
and channels across both existing and
new geographies, all while continuing
to deliver a consistent pipeline of new
product development (NPD), expanding
our ranges, formats and flavours.
READ MORE, SEE STRATEGIC GROWTH PAGE 16
Existing customers
Existing customer growth is achieved
through our focus on increased shelf
space which is achieved by increased
SKUs within existing product offerings,
the expansion of our existing product
range, as well as expanded rollout of
distribution end points and achieving
deeper penetration across all available
channels.
Strengthening our relationships with
existing customers has been one of the
most important drivers of performance
in FY25. In the UK, revenue from existing
customers grew significantly, supported
by deeper engagement with major
retail partners, where our previously
announced joint business plan (JBP)
has unlocked additional shelf space in a
national retailer with a broader range of
listings in new and existing categories,
in addition to deeper distribution within
their estate. The JBP has provided the
retailer with early access to new product
development, allowing them to take new
products to market quickly.
A key success of the JBP has been our
ability to appeal to consumers across
the breadth of the retailer’s category
offering and deliver new products in line
with consumer demands. These products
showcase our ability to innovate in an
agile way, such as with popular offerings
in a new format, new products based on
consumer demand, new innovation, as
well as growing classic sports nutrition
products.
We have continued to see excellent
progress in UK retail, with both
additional listings and deeper
penetration. Taking into account recent
data, total product placements across
grocery and high street increased by
over 95% in 2025 compared to 2024
2
.
In Europe, existing customer growth
was supported by the strength of our
long‑standing distributor relationships
and the increasing recognition of the
Applied Nutrition brand. Performance
has been driven by expanded listings in
discount retail and specialist channels,
as well as ongoing growth at gyms and
sports clubs.
Existing customer growth in international
markets was more measured, reflecting
the previously announced exit from an
agreement with a distributor. Excluding
the sales made to that distributor,
international sales grew by 13% between
FY24 and FY25 and we have a clear
pathway to accelerated growth across
the region in FY26.
While the US business remains in its
infancy, we have continued to develop
relationships with key retail and certain
distribution partners, as well as launch
tailored products catered towards US
consumers.
New customers and channels
Leveraging our proven internationally
successful B2B model, new customer
relationships are established within both
existing and new channels, including
entry into new geographies.
We made good progress in winning
listings with new retailers and expanding
into additional channels during the year.
In the UK, significant new wins included
several major multiples, positioning our
products alongside everyday consumer
staples and significantly broadening
our reach. Being present in mainstream
grocery enhances brand visibility and
ensures that our products are accessible
to a wide consumer base.
Internationally, we extended our
global footprint and entered numerous
new geographies in eastern Europe,
Latin America and Asia. As previously
announced, we also made encouraging
progress in Latin America, where we
have entered new geographies in the
region and we are benefitting from
growing consumer demand. We also
continue to explore opportunities with
local partners in new markets, which will
allow the brand to grow in markets that
are difficult to access because of trade
barriers.
In the US, we have continued to build
our presence across both specialist and
grocery channels. Key progress includes
our launch of the AN Performance range
with The Vitamin Shoppe as well as the
previously announced listings with three
major new partners: GNC Corporate,
Hy‑Vee and H‑E‑B.
2. Source: Circana – Major Multiples (moving annual), store count where scanned (week ending 4 October 2025).
9
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
CHIEF EXECUTIVE
OFFICER’S REVIEW
CONTINUED
Performance review continued
Innovation and NPD
NPD allows us to expand our existing
ranges, products and flavours, and
therefore help support further growth
across existing customers, new
customers and direct to consumer
(D2C). Innovation is at our core and is
enabled by our in-house manufacturing
capability. Ourcommitment to NPD fuels
customer engagement, drives consumer
demand, and helps us remain agile in
the rapidly evolving sports nutrition,
health and wellness market.
In the year we released a series of
new products that have been very
well‑received across our customer and
consumer base. These new products
have been developed in line with our
three‑pronged approach to NPD:
Fill opportunity gaps: In late 2024 we
launched a Sparkling Collagen Protein
Water, tapping into consumer demand
for refreshing, low‑calorie ways to
hydrate and hit protein goals.
Keeping products fresh: Across the
market, there had been a lack of
innovation in the range of products
marketed to endurance athletes;
therefore, in early 2025 we launched
a collaboration with Vimto in our
Endurance range offering products
such as gels and effervescent tablets
tointroduce new flavours in the
category. The partnership with Vimto
has driven our Endurance range to
be the fastest‑growing Energy and
Hydration brand in the UK grocery
andhigh street
3
.
Access emerging trends: In 2025 we
launched specific ranges of products
in different formats, which allows
them to appeal to broader audiences.
For example, we introduced creatine
in a gummy format to make it more
accessible and convenient for
consumers who are starting to use
creatine for benefits beyond sports
performance. We also began offering
health and wellness products such
as collagen in stick‑packs, which are
preferred by some consumers for their
convenience.
In addition to the examples above,
wecontinued to build out our product
portfolio, especially in more recently
developed ranges, such as the launch of
protein offerings and wellbeing products
in the BodyFuel range.
D2C growth
Our D2C strategy will continue to
complement our B2B strategy in certain
geographies, whilst simultaneously
building Applied Nutrition’s brand
awareness with consumers. Our D2C
channel remains a smaller part of the
business but continues to grow steadily
and plays an important complementary
role alongside our B2B model.
Overall D2C sales were aided by
improvement in the customer experience
with the launch of the Applied Nutrition
app and enablement of subscription
options via our app and website, amongst
other incremental improvements to our
D2C offering.
Capital allocation and investing
forgrowth
Future investment
We continue to follow a disciplined
approach to capital allocation, with
a focus on investing in growth while
maintaining a strong financial position.
Our priority remains reinvesting in the
business to support future expansion
while ensuring we have the capability to
pursue opportunities that can enhance
shareholder returns.
As announced at the time of IPO, we had
completed a manufacturing extension,
increasing production capacity to
c.£160 million of revenue in early FY25.
Throughout the year, we focused on
driving efficiencies in our manufacturing
processes and, as a result, we are now
comfortable that the capacity of our
current facility now allows the Group’s
revenues to be increased to c.£200 million.
Taking into account current trading and the
lead time required to plan and execute
further manufacturing capacity projects,
we have begun to execute our latest
phase of investment to ensure we can
continue to expand and deliver in line
with the growth opportunity we see.
This includes further automation,
specialist production (which is currently
outsourced), additional storage capacity
(where third‑party warehousing is
currently being utilised) and additional
office space.
The following capital projects will
support the current trajectory of
theGroup:
Production expansion
Over the next 18‑24 months we
intend to invest approximately £2.0 to
£2.5million to ensure the business has
the operations to support its continued
expansion, drive efficiencies and reduce
reliance on outsourced providers. This
investment is expected to increase
capacity to c.£300 million of revenue
andwillinclude:
Additional automated packaging lines
adding capacity and efficiency. This
will benefit margins as less labour
hours are needed to produce the same
volumes.
A new gel machine, as a result of the
continued growth of the Company’s gel
products. There has been a significant
increase in the demand for products
from the Company in gel format in
recent years: in existing products;
newproducts brought to market (such
as the Vimto gel collaboration); and
extension of other products into a gel
format as a new option.
In addition, the Company is considering
an investment into machinery that will
allow us to produce one of our
fastest‑growing products in‑house.
Thisis a more expensive addition, with a
potential cost of approximately £2.5million
to install. However, the Company
estimates that based on current volumes
the payback period would be in the
region of four years. This would be
reduced if our volumes increase, or the
Company is able to secure contracts to
produce on a white label basis, resulting
in increased utilisation.
Further investment will be assessed
on a case‑by‑case basis where volume
requirements and payback meet our
criteria.
3. Source: Circana – Major Multiples (value % growth L12wks), Brands with 52 week sales of >£1 million (week ending 6 September 2025).
10
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
New global distribution facility
and head office
We intend to enter a lease for a newly
purpose‑built warehouse adjacent to our
current location which will provide the
following benefits:
increase storage capacity by an
estimated 180% and improve margins
by eliminating the need for use of
several external third‑party warehouses
and reduce inefficiencies resulting from
these multiple locations of stock;
additional single‑site office space which
will allow all non‑manufacturing teams
to work on the same site and increase
collaboration; and
provide a new headquarters to host our
existing and potential global partners
While the purchase of the land and
construction of the building will be borne
by the landlord, we will incur the normal
costs of fit‑out and associated equipment
which may be required. Thecurrent
estimate for this is £3.5 to £4.0 million.
Weexpect to sign the lease beforethe
end of2025, and any agreement will
be subject to planning permission
and completed construction. The
landlord expects to be granted planning
permission in late 2025 and construction
to be finished in early FY27, although
these approximate timings are subject
tochange.
After the move is complete, our current
warehouses will be repurposed for
expanded production and for raw
materials and packaging storage,
respectively, while the new warehouse
will be dedicated to finished goods
storage and distribution.
Marketing activities
We continue to build out our brand
strategy, designed to deliver a strong,
trusted brand that drives demand and
makes us the product of choice for
consumers. In our model, the focus is
not only on reaching end users but also
on equipping distributors with the tools,
messaging and brand equity needed to
accelerate sell‑through. By investing in
consistent branding, targeted marketing
campaigns and clear product positioning,
we enhance visibility and credibility
across the globe. We have multiple
avenues of achieving this by interacting
with customers, whether that be
through partnerships and collaborations,
attending exhibitions andother
promotional activity.
Within the period, we have made
significant progress with our marketing
activities. We signed several brand
ambassadors and influencers and
launched our first TV advert to promote
our products.
Post period, we appointed a Chief
Marketing Officer with extensive industry
experience to lead the marketing team
and support our global growth.
Leveraging our strong, trusted brand
and consumer recognition, we are
progressing opportunities, both internally
and through partnerships, toexpand into
adjacent growth markets and capitalise
on the consumer trends we benefit from.
Current trading and outlook
The positive momentum experienced in
the final quarter of FY25 has continued
into the opening months of the new
financial year, supported by strong
consumer demand across our core
categories and growing recognition
of our brands both in the UK and
internationally. Early FY26 trading trends
reflect a continuation of the progress
made in market share through deeper
distribution, increased shelf space and
an expanding product range.
Our investment in additional capacity,
automation and new product formats
positions the Group to deliver sustained
growth over the medium term.
We remain confident that our core
strengths: our B2B‑focused model,
breadth of high‑quality products and
industry‑leading innovation will continue
to underpin strong revenue growth and
profitability over the long term.
While the trajectory of the business
remains encouraging with a strong Q1
FY26, it is still early in the financial year;
therefore, our full‑year expectations for
FY26 remain unchanged at this stage.
Thomas Ryder
Founder and CEO of Applied Nutrition
7 November 2025
11
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
INVESTMENT
CASE
1.
SIGNIFICANT MARKET
OPPORTUNITY
£279BN
The global sports nutrition, health and wellness
market is projected to grow to over £279 billion
bythe end of 2028 at a CAGR of c.8%
1
.
The number of consumers taking protein
supplements for their general health almost
doubledin 2024 when compared with 2021.
3.
SUCCESSFUL B2B BUSINESS MODEL
91% OF REVENUE IS B2B
B2B business model with a low-risk, highly
cost‑effective go‑to‑market strategy which has
allowed the Group to leverage local knowledge
ininternational markets.
Broad range of routes‑to‑market, ensuring that
Applied Nutrition products are highly accessible
by its diversified consumer base through
multiplechannels.
READ MORE, SEE OUR BUSINESS MODEL AND STRATEGY PAGE 14
2.
TRUSTED BRAND WITH
BROAD CONSUMER APPEAL
TRUSTED BY ATHLETES
Multiple site accreditations from professional
bodies, including the BRC‑GS Global Food Safety
certification.
Collaborations and partnerships with professional
athletes and sports clubs.
READ MORE, SEE PAGE 21
4.
IN-HOUSE MANUFACTURING
AND NPD ENGINE
80%
80% of sales accounted for by our 91k sq. ft.
manufacturing site in Knowsley.
The Group’s control of its manufacturing process
enables production flexibility and margin protection.
Recently expanded Knowsley facility is key to
successful NPD, enabling the Group to nimbly react
and align to consumer trends at rapid pace.
1. Euromonitor International Consumer Health Passport 2024 Edition.
12
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
5.
IMPRESSIVE FINANCIAL GROWTH
44%
Three‑year revenue and adjusted EBITDA compound
annual growth rate (CAGR).
The Group has increased revenue from £35.0 million
in FY22 to £107.1 million in FY25 and adjusted
EBITDA has risen from £10.4 million to £30.9 million
in the same period.
High operating margin, strong cash generation
anda debt-free balance sheet.
READ MORE, SEE FINANCIAL REVIEW PAGE 38
7.
FOUNDER-LED AMBITIOUS TEAM
15 YEARS
The Group’s founder, Thomas Ryder, has more than
15 years of experience in the sports nutrition, health
and wellness industry across retailing, wholesaling
and manufacturing.
Supported by a team with deep industry knowledge
and long‑term ambitions and complemented by a
USCEO.
READ MORE, SEE CEO Q&A PAGE 4
6.
MULTIPLE PILLARS OF GROWTH
Multi‑pillar growth strategy underpinned
byglobalmegatrends.
Existing customers: grow shelf space
anddistribution end points.
New customers: enter new geographies
andthrough new channels.
NPD: capabilities drive growth by expanding
ranges,products, formats and flavours.
READ MORE, SEE OUR BUSINESS MODEL AND STRATEGY PAGE 14
13
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
OUR BUSINESS
MODEL AND
STRATEGY
OUR PURPOSE
We Fuel Your Moment™. Whether that’s to Fuel your healthier lifestyle, Fuel your workout or
Fuel your elite performance, We’re here to Fuel Your Moment.
INNOVATE
WHAT DRIVES AND SUPPORTS US
DELIVER
Agility and speed
f In‑house, UK‑based
manufacturing.
f Speed to market.
f Ability to scale rapidly.
f Expert Board and
managementteam.
f In‑house new product development.
OUR MARKETS OUR GOVERNANCE AND RISK MANAGEMENT
f £279 billion total addressablemarket
1
.
f Increased focus on health andwellness.
f Drive for accessibility andconvenience.
Our primarily B2B model is low‑cost and
low‑risk – allowing distributors to leverage
their local knowledge of international markets.
Trusted for quality
f Informed Sport certification.
f Accredited to the highest worldwide
standards including BRC AA+ grade,
US Federal Drug Administration
(FDA), Good Manufacturing
Practices (GMP) and ISO 22000.
f Trusted partnerships with
worldwide recognised brands
suchas Chiquita.
Financial strength
f Strong revenue growth driven by a
global B2B business model.
f High margin profile and cash flow
generation.
f Cash‑flow focused philosophy with
carefully considered investment in
capital expenditure to support growth.
f Multiple levers of sustainable
long‑term growth.
f Net cash position.
SEE PAGES 42 TO 51
Continuous NPD
B2B
91%
D2C
9%
Distributor
Retailer
Gym/
Sports
Club
Online
1. Euromonitor International Consumer Health Passport 2024 Edition.
14
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
OUR VISION
To become the world’s most trusted and innovative
sports nutrition, health and wellness brand.
SCALE ACHIEVEMENTS
OUR VALUES
Our values drive the culture that is the glue holding everything together – it’s what we stand for and what defines who we are.
Agility and speed
85+
Countries
New products such as creatine
gummies and Sparkling Collagen
Protein Water.
READ MORE PAGE 10
Our strategy is built to
maximise massive and
growing market potential
through leveraging our
strengths and relationships.
Trusted for quality
Available in leading retailers such as
Walmart, GNC, Holland & Barrett and
allmajor UK grocery chains.
NPD
Nominated as NPD partner
forHolland& Barrett.
AA+
Quality rating renewed BRC audit.
Financial strength
£200M
Completed manufacturing extension,
increasing production capacity to
allow revenue growth to c.£200 million.
29%
Adjusted EBITDA margin.
Family – One team.
We look after each
other, celebrate
success and pull
together when
it’stough.
Agility – We’re a
big, small company!
We remain agile
and entrepreneurial
which allows us to
act at pace.
Customer first –
Weobsess over
quality, safety and
innovation – because
our customers expect
the best. Sodo we.
Trust – We do things
right. Open, honest,
no shortcuts. Our
customers can rely
on us.
Originality – Welead
through bold ideas
and constant
innovation. Staying
still isn’t an option.
Respect – Every
person matters,
regardless of title.
Every voice is heard.
Continuous NPD
B2B
Existing customers:
Expand shelf space.
Increase end points.
New customers:
New geographies.
New customers.
New channels.
D2C
Continues to
complement B2B and
build brand awareness.
Retailer
Consumers
Gym/
Sports
Club
appliednutrition.uk ansupps.com
15
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
As a leading sports nutrition, health
and wellness brand, we recognise the
importance of having a clear strategy
for growth in place to focus our
intentions and enable us to maintain
our market position.
Given our largely B2B business
model, we have several key strategic
growth areas, focused on existing
and new customers, with a further
complementary pillar for our growing
D2C channel.
With our products now available in over
85 countries worldwide, we continue
to see strong returns on our strategic
growth objectives through ongoing
execution to help further expand our
reach, grow our revenues and further
cement our position as a leading
company in the nutrition, health and
wellness market.
Our growth strategy is to deepen our
relationships with existing customers
through increased shelf space and
distribution, whilst also securing new
customers and channels across both
existing and new geographies. We will
do this while continuing to deliver a
consistent pipeline of new product
development, expanding our ranges,
formats and flavours.
The below summarises our key strategic
pillars and our progress in the year.
STRATEGIC
GROWTH
PROGRESS IN THE YEAR LOOKING AHEAD
By engaging with our existing
suppliers and strengthening our
relationships, we can further
build on our presence in stores.
These relationships help us
deliver new products that meet
customer demands.
Joint business plan (JBP) with Holland & Barrett
increased the range of products available and helped
bring new products to market quickly.
Expanded presence in discount retail in UK and
internationally, with dedicated product lines for
this channel.
Additional listings in specialist channels
across Europe.
Continued innovation
with new products to
match changing customer
demands and market
trends.
Build further expansion
with these key strategic
partners.
PROGRESS IN THE YEAR LOOKING AHEAD
Expanding product rollout and
deepening our penetration
across all channels to help raise
brand awareness and making
it even easier for consumers to
find our products.
Through the JBP with Holland & Barrett we have
increased distribution within their estate.
Strengthened presence at gyms and sports clubs
tomake it even easier for consumers to access our
products and increase brand awareness.
Growth delivered in year through distribution partners.
Building on distribution
relationships to equip
partners with tools and
materials needed to
deliver growth.
Further integration with
newer partners to help
extend our footprint.
EXISTING CUSTOMERS
INCREASE SHELF SPACE
INCREASE DISTRIBUTION END POINTS
16
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
NEW CUSTOMERS
NEW GEOGRAPHIES
PROGRESS IN THE YEAR LOOKING AHEAD
Building on our proven
international success to
capitalise on significant market
opportunities globally.
Extended our global footprint by entering new
geographies across eastern Europe, Latin America
and Asia.
Entry into Canada, working alongside one of the largest
distributors, represents scalability of B2B strategy.
Developing relationships
with new distributors to
aid growth internationally.
Expand tailored products
for specific geographies
in recognition of different
tastes and trends.
NEW CUSTOMERS AND CHANNELS
PROGRESS IN THE YEAR LOOKING AHEAD
Establishing new customer
relationships and exploring new
channels to market to make our
products readily available to a
wider audience.
Greater presence in mainstream stores, positioning
products alongside everyday staples to help increase
our brand visibility and make products available to
a wider consumer base.
Continued growth across
new channels, partnering
with new retailers to
expand presence further.
PROGRESS IN THE YEAR LOOKING AHEAD
Help deliver this growth by
continuing to innovate with
new products, expanding brand
partnerships, new formats
and new flavours with a view
to fill opportunity gaps, keep
productsfresh and access
emerging trends.
Launched a Sparkling Collagen Protein Water, tapping
into consumer demand for refreshing, low‑calorie ways
to hydrate and hit protein goals.
Delivered a collaboration with Vimto in our Endurance
range offering products such as gels and effervescent
tablets to introduce new flavours in the category.
Launched specific ranges of products in different
formats, which allows them to appeal to a broader
audience.
Ongoing commitment to new
product development to fuel
further customer demand
and respond quickly to
an ever‑evolving market.
INNOVATION AND NPD
INNOVATION AND NPD
17
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
SUSTAINABILITY
We recognise that we are at the
beginning of our journey and are taking
a holistic approach to ensure that
responsible practices are integrated
across our business. Our sustainability
commitments extend to our people
andcustomers, our products and
our partnerships. We consider
climate‑related matters in any major
strategic decisions, including budgeting,
capital expenditure and expansion
into new territories. We are eager to
learn from industry leaders, set clear
expectations for our suppliers and
partners, and develop a robust strategy
with measurable targets.
At Board level, to support our
ambitions, Tony Buffin is responsible for
sustainability and Deepti Velury Bakhshi
is the designated Non‑Executive Director
for workforce engagement.
The Group has not included a
Non‑Financial and Sustainability
Information Statement under section
414CB asweare not in scope of this
atthecurrenttime.
STRATEGIC
PILLARS
PRODUCT
PEOPLE
PARTNERSHIPS
18
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
As a recently listed company, we recognise
the importance of sustainability and are
committed to creating value with a sense
ofresponsibility towards the wider society,
environment and communities around us.
PEOPLE
As a founder-led business, we
take great pride in our strong team
culture, where every employee is
valued and empowered. Together,
we are building a healthier, stronger
community.
Staff engagement
Our people are the foundation of our
success. We support in their professional
growth, ensuring they develop the
skills and expertise essential for our
long‑term vision and strategic goals.
By fostering a supportive and dynamic
work environment, we empower our
employees to thrive and perform at
theirbest.
To deliver employee engagement, it’s
important that we nurture a culture of
diversity, inclusivity, open communication
and continuous development. Employees
have direct access to leadership, including
our CEO, through day‑to‑day interaction
and open channels like WhatsApp,
ensuring their voices are heard.
We have also recently introduced regular
employee net promoter surveys to help
us monitor our staff engagement levels.
This allows us to see what contributes
positively to our employees’ view of
working at Applied Nutrition and to
ensure we are quick to address any
drop in engagement.
We prioritise fair pay and strong working
conditions, with our lowest‑paid staff
earning 10% above the UK minimum
wage, increasing to 16% after six months.
We offer competitive compensation,
avoid zero‑hour contracts and ensure
overtime is paid at a premium.
All employees participated in an
exceptional annual bonus scheme
awarded in the year, rewarding the hard
work, dedication and support towards
our exceptional growth and milestone
achievements in our tenth year.
Diversity and inclusion
Our goal is to cultivate a highly skilled
and diverse workforce that enhances
our understanding of customers and
markets. A wide range of perspectives
and experiences strengthens our ability
to innovate, make informed decisions
and consistently exceed customer
expectations. We are committed to
providing an inclusive environment
where diversity is embraced, and every
individual is supported in reaching their
full potential.
This commitment is reflected in our
workforce, which includes employees
from 13 different nationalities.
We provide support to non‑native
English speakers, ensuring company
communications are available in multiple
languages. Werecognise that our gender
diversity could be improved and, while
it reflects the systemic challenges the
manufacturing industry faces, we are
first focused on ensuring we have a
diverse Board.
10% RISING TO 16%
Our lowest‑paid staff earn 10% above the
UK minimum wage on joining, rising to
16% after six months of employment
19
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
Health and safety
Health and safety are paramount, and
this is overseen by our health and safety
manager. We encourage all employees
to report hazards via QR code‑enabled
posters, with incidents, near‑misses and
health and safety initiatives reported to
the Board monthly.
Our ISO 45001 certification demonstrates
our dedication to a safe working
environment, and in the year we had no
serious injuries. However, it is important
that we continue to reduce the actual
number of incidents through better
awareness across the business.
In addition to compliance with all
relevant legislation, we continuously
improve safety awareness through
regular training and toolbox talks.
Through our HR software, we record
all training received to ensure the
appropriate refreshers are rolled
outwhen required.
We believe in promoting healthier
lifestyles and ensuring our products
support people in their health and
wellness journey, whether they
are a professional athlete or a
health‑conscious employee. With this
in mind, we provide staff discount to
help our employees, and their families,
achieve their wellness goals. This year
we will be rolling out annual hearing
tests for all our production staff.
Supporting our community
We seek to recruit from our local
community and many of our employees
live within a few miles of our facilities.
We are also proud to offer short‑term
work experience opportunities for young
people in the local area, and this has
been well supported.
Beyond our workplace there are
several ways we give back to our local
community. We have strong links
with Knowsley Council and Alder Hey
Children’s Hospital, raising £165,000
for Alder Hey in the past year. We
contributed towards the extension and
improvement of the facilities at Acorn
Community Farm, which is just up the
road from our manufacturing facilities.
Also in the year, we sponsored new
football kits for the local high school
to help empower young athletes and
encourage their health and fitness
journey.
Human rights and modern slavery
We are committed to a zero‑tolerance
policy on modern slavery, and we
expect both those who work within our
organisation and our external partners to
adhere to and respect the highest ethical
standards in working conditions. We are
dedicated in our efforts to uphold human
rights across our business and regularly
review our policies and systems to
ensure they align with the highest
standards.
Our Ethical Trading and Modern Slavery
Policy is available to all employees
and, as part of our comprehensive
assessment for new suppliers, we must
see evidence of similar policies from
any of the partners we choose to work
with. Our Modern Slavery and Human
Trafficking Statement is reviewed
annually and is available on our website.
Our Whistleblowing Policy encourages
employees to report any wrongdoings
within the business. Translations of these
documents are also readily available.
Data protection, data privacy
anddata security
We maintain a comprehensive privacy
framework that outlines our approach
to managing personal data, and this is
detailed on our website with statements
for both consumers and businesses.
Where relevant, employees are required
to complete mandatory data protection
training.
To ensure compliance with the European
GDPR, UK GDPR and other relevant
privacy regulations in the regions in
which we operate, we collaborate closely
with legal experts. We have strong
security measures and internal controls
in place, reinforcing our commitment to
responsible data management.
SUSTAINABILITY
CONTINUED
20
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
We are dedicated to providing
high-quality, safe and accessible
products, leveraging our scaled in-house
manufacturing and newproduct delivery
engine to adapt quickly to market needs.
Manufactured in our state‑of‑the‑art,
AA+ BRC‑certified facility, our products
cater to a wide range of consumers,
including those with specific dietary
needs. Our range includes vegan,
lactose‑free, Halal‑certified, and Informed
Sport‑tested products, ensuring
inclusivity and compliance with the
highest industry standards.
We cater to a wide range of consumers,
from elite athletes and serious
gym‑goers wanting to prioritise their
performance and recovery, to those
simply looking to support their wellbeing.
We have a diverse product range to
cater for all needs and price points. Our
products are all low‑sugar formulations
with better alternative sweeteners to
support balanced nutrition.
Our in‑house manufacturing and
R&D capabilities enable us to quickly
respond to better meet changing health
challenges. An example of this is our
Complete Protein product that has been
formulated to specifically meet the
needs of the over 50s and the increasing
number of people on weight‑loss drugs
containing GLP‑1.
We are continuously working to
minimise our packaging materials
while maintaining product integrity,
with strategies in place to reduce
environmental impact across the
packaging lifecycle. The majority of our
packaging is fully recyclable, and we are
actively exploring further sustainable
alternatives with our suppliers.
Where possible, we use local sourcing
initiatives to reduce emissions and
ecological impact. We ensure that we
have full traceability throughout our
ethical ingredient sourcing, and we don’t
use palm oil in any of our formulations.
As we expand, we remain committed to
sourcing sustainable ingredients and
packaging solutions where possible.
As a producer and distributor of food
products, we adhere to strict regulations
on manufacturing, ingredients, labelling,
packaging and safety. As a registered
food business operator in the UK, we
ensure that any non‑food products we
distribute meet general safety standards
under UK and EU law. While no specific
licences or registrations are required
in the UK, we collaborate with local
specialists in other markets to maintain
compliance.
Environment
Applied Nutrition operates with a
relatively low environmental impact,
including a modest carbon footprint,
minimal chemicals, and no water
usage within our in‑house production
processes. However, we recognise that
all businesses have a responsibility to
consider their effects on climate change
and the broader environment. We do
notoperate in any areas of high or
extremely high levels of water stress,
and do not see water as a material
risk tothe business due to the low
consumption rates.
All of our in‑house production processes
are based in Knowsley, Liverpool
where we operate a modern, efficient
manufacturing facility designed to
minimise waste and energy consumption.
We have introduced LED lighting and
automatic sensors to optimise energy
use and are seeking the provision of
renewable power as a key consideration
in the renewal of our energy contracts
for our site. We are actively monitoring
our environmental impact, working
to establish baseline data for Scope 1
and 2 emissions, and have embedded
climate‑related risk reporting into our
overall business strategy. Details of
our Scope 1, 2 and 3 emissions can be
found within our SECR disclosure on
thefollowing page.
PRODUCT
WE ARE DEDICATED TO
PROVIDING HIGH-QUALITY,
SAFE AND ACCESSIBLE
PRODUCTS. OUR IN-HOUSE
MANUFACTURING AND R&D
CAPABILITIES ENABLE US TO
QUICKLY RESPOND TO BETTER
MEET CHANGING HEALTH
CHALLENGES.”
Thomas Ryder
Founder and CEO of Applied Nutrition
21
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
Environment continued
We are ISO 14001:2015 certified,
underscoring our commitment to
environmental management. Our waste
reduction initiatives include maximising
recycling and minimising landfill
contributions, andwe are proactively
identifying ways to enhance efficiency
further.
We currently do not have any
climate‑related targets. In preparation for
listing publicly, our initial focus was on
establishing our Scope 1 and 2 footprint
in order to comply with SECR reporting
requirements. Weare now focusing on
establishing our wider Scope3 footprint,
after which we will be able to consider
establishing climate‑related targets.
Streamlined Energy
andCarbonReporting
Our Streamlined Energy and Carbon
Reporting (SECR) disclosure includes
all emissions sources required under
the 2019 regulations for the financial
year ended 31 July 2025. The Company
maintains an internal document to
enable it to calculate energy usage and
CO
2
emissions. Energy usage is obtained
from a variety of sources including
external invoices and internal meter
readings.
We have outlined our emissions and
energy usage across all our UK‑based
operations. As we have limited sales
operations in the US and no in‑house
manufacturing there, we do not consider
the emissions here to be material to our
reporting at this stage and therefore
have excluded them.
SUSTAINABILITY
CONTINUED
PRODUCT CONTINUED
The following emissions are covered
in the scope of this report:
Scope 1 – These include direct
emissions released from owned
Company vehicles;
Scope 2 – These are indirect emissions
produced off‑site when generating
electricity and gas directly consumed
by the Company; and
Scope 3 – These are emissions
from fuel purchased or mileage
for employee‑owned vehicles.
Nodisclosure is made for indirect
emissions which the Company does
notown or control (such as outsourced
manufacturing and distribution).
Scope 1 and 2 emissions increased to
230.2
tCO
2
e in 2025 from 131.5 tCO
2
e
in2024.
There are a number of contributing
factors to this increase, not just the
growth in business. We now have better
systems in place to ensure a more
accurate measure of our emissions.
Alsoin the year, we added a new truck
toour fleet and expanded our facilities
with a new warehouse.
We report our emissions and energy
intensity as tonnes CO
2
e/£m revenue and
kWh/£m revenue. Emissions intensity
has increased by 40.5% this year, while
energy intensity has increased by 37.8%.
2025 2024
kWh tC0
2
e kWh tC0
2
e
Emissions from combustion of gas and pool
or leased vehicles Scope 1 70,800 30.6 54,541 15.7
Emissions from purchased electricity Scope 2 802,963 166.3 543,103 112.5
Emissions from purchased gas Scope 2 182,159 33.3 18,171 3.3
Total Scope 1 and 2 emissions 1,055,922 230.2 615,815 131.5
Emissions from business travel from
employee‑owned vehicles Scope 3 20,137 5.7 8,795 2.5
Total Scope 1, 2 and 3 emissions 1,076,059 235.9 624,610 134.0
Intensity ratios
Emissions intensity ratio per £m revenue 2.15 1.53
Energy intensity ratio per £m revenue 9,859 7,144
22
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
Strong, responsible partnerships
underpin our approach. We work
closely with trusted suppliers to source
high-quality ingredients while ensuring
ethical practices throughout our supply
chain.
Our relationships with long‑standing
partners can de‑risk our supply chain
and allow us the flexibility to purchase
raw materials efficiently at optimal price
points, to help fuel our new product
development and meet market demand.
Our partnerships extend beyond
sourcing. We collaborate with key
distributors and retailers in the UK and
internationally to ensure our products
meet local regulatory standards. We are
committed to maintaining fair labour
practices and high ethical sourcing
standards, including undertaking
audits and due diligence to prevent
modern slavery.
We undertake extensive due diligence
when selecting any new partner,
providing, with expectation of adherence
to, our Code of Conduct, which outlines
the standards we hold ourselves and
our partners to. This includes our
commitment to preventing modern
slavery, servitude, forced or compulsory
labour and human trafficking within our
operations and supply chain.
Looking ahead
We are at the early stages of our
sustainability efforts and recognise the
need to build upon the foundations we
have established. We will formalise
our sustainability strategy, set clear
KPIs and further integrate responsible
practices across our operations. We are
committed to continuous improvement,
transparency and collaboration as we
work towards a more sustainable future.
By leveraging our passion, expertise
and partnerships, we aim to make a
lasting positive impact on our people,
our products, our environment and the
communities we serve.
PARTNERSHIPS
23
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
Climate change provides us with both risks and opportunities
as a business. We recognise the importance of our response to
this and the impact it has on our long-term success.
We are committed to identifying, assessing and responding
effectively to these issues with transparency and ongoing
improvement.
We have provided information to stakeholders on the potential
climate‑related risks and opportunities for our business and
value chains, and our relevant governance structures related
to our climate ambition, in turn helping them to make informed
decisions.
While this is our first year reporting against the Task Force
on Climate‑related Financial Disclosures (TCFD), we will
continue to deepen our analysis and disclosures in the years
ahead as our data, scenario modelling and risk management
approachesdevelop.
In line with UK Listing Rules (LR 9.8.6R) we disclose our first
TCFD report. This report is consistent with the four TCFD
pillars and outlines our initial disclosures and compliance
under the TCFD framework, as set out below.
TASK FORCE ON CLIMATE-RELATED
FINANCIALDISCLOSURES
RECOMMENDATION RECOMMENDED DISCLOSURES COMPLIANCE REFERENCE
GOVERNANCE
Disclose the organisation’s
governance around
climate‑related risks
and opportunities.
a) Describe the Board’s oversight of climate‑related
risks and opportunities
Compliant Page 25
b) Describe management’s role in assessing and
managing climate‑related risks and opportunities
Compliant Page 25
STRATEGY
Disclose the actual and
potential impacts of
climate‑related risks
and opportunities on the
organisation’s businesses,
strategy and financial
planning where such
information is material.
a) Describe the climate‑related risks and
opportunities the organisation has identified over
the short, medium and long term
Compliant Pages 27 to 29
b) Describe the impact of climate‑related risks and
opportunities on the organisation’s businesses,
strategy and financial planning
Compliant Page 27
c) Describe the resilience of the organisation’s
strategy, taking into consideration different
climate‑related scenarios, including a 2°C
or lower scenario
Compliant Page 27
RISK MANAGEMENT
Disclose how the
organisation identifies,
assesses and manages
climate‑related risks.
a) Describe the organisation’s processes for
identifying and assessingclimate‑related risks
Compliant Page 26
b) Describe the organisation’s processes for
managing climate‑relatedrisks
Non‑compliant
Processes to be
reviewed and
developed over
theyear ahead.
Page 26
c) Describe how processes for identifying, assessing
and managing climate‑related risks are integrated
into the organisation’s overall risk management
Compliant Page 26
METRICS AND TARGETS
Disclose the metrics and
targets used to assess
and manage relevant
climate‑related risks and
opportunities where such
information is material.
a) Disclose the metrics used by the organisation to
assess climate‑related risks and opportunities
in line with its strategy andrisk management
process
Partially compliant
Metrics have been
identified but not all
were measured in
the year.
Page 31
b) Disclose Scope 1, Scope 2 and, if appropriate,
Scope 3 greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions, and the
related risks
Compliant Page 31
c) Describe the targets used by the organisation to
manage climate‑related risks and opportunities
and performance againsttargets
Non‑compliant
Targets will be set
once all measures
are in place.
Page 31
24
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
GOVERNANCE
The Board’s oversight of
climate‑related risks and
opportunities
The Group’s Audit and Risk Committee
(ARC) has overall responsibility for
climate‑related matters, receiving
annual updates each October on risks,
opportunities, emission metrics and draft
TCFD disclosures for approval. Climate
considerations are also embedded into
major strategic decisions by the Board,
including budgeting, capital expenditure
and expansion into new territories, and
Board papers include a dedicated section
on climate‑related matters.
Management’s role in assessing
and managing climate‑related risks
and opportunities
Our Executive Committee, comprising
the CEO, COO and CFO, holds day‑to‑day
responsibility for managing all
climate‑related risks and opportunities.
Meeting biannually, the Committee
reviews the risk register, engaging
with senior departmental managers to
capture and report their risk updates to
the ARC.
In addition, the Executive Committee is
responsible for implementation of our
climate change strategy, focusing on
risk mitigations, opportunity realisation
and the measuring and monitoring of
the Group’s emissions. The Executive
Committee communicates with staff
on a daily basis to ensure that, where
necessary, climate‑related opportunities
are being pursued.
Our climate‑related governance structure
is summarised in the graphic below.
BOARD LEVEL
THROUGH ARC
MANAGEMENT LEVEL
THROUGH EXECUTIVE
COMMITTEE
OPERATIONAL
LEVEL
Overall
climate change
responsibility
Day-to-day management of
climate-related risks and opportunities
Responsible for adopting and implementing
climate-related strategy and targets
Risks, Progress and Metrics
Operations/Strategy
25
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
TASK FORCE ON CLIMATE-RELATED FINANCIALDISCLOSURES
CONTINUED
RISK MANAGEMENT
Our processes to identify, assess
and manage climate‑related risks
and opportunities
We continue to develop our risk
management process and how we
identify principal risks to include in our
risk register. The initial risk register
categorises all existing and emerging
risks, including climate change, with
the register covering the probability of
the risk occurring and the degree of the
potential impact.
The risk register also identifies an
owner for each risk, any current risk
management or mitigation steps, and
outlines proposed further actions.
All risks are assessed on a 5x4 matrix
incorporating an assessment of the
likelihood of occurrence and the potential
financial impact, based on a missed
opportunity, profit or liability impact,
aswell as the extent to which they are
being addressed and mitigated.
In combination, this information enables
the identification of principal risks, which
allows the Board to identify and monitor
risks in the context of overall strategy.
In addition, it helps in the determination
of the management treatment of
risks, and helps prioritise resources
in managing the most material
climate‑related risks.
Risks are subject to continual refinement
and quantification over time, which
assists in any required incorporation of
climate‑related risks into the Group’s
overall budgeting, strategy and financial
statements.
Potential financial impacts associated
with the risk impacts are defined as
follows:
SCORE 1 2 3 4
Impact Minor Significant Major Critical
Financial measure
Impact or lost
opportunity of
<£0.5m
Impact or lost
opportunity of
£0.5m‑£1.0m
Impact or lost
opportunity of
£1.0m‑£2.0m
Impact or lost
opportunity
of >£2m
Risk likelihood of occurrence is defined under five categories:
RATING 1 2 3 4 5
Criteria Remote Unlikely Possible Likely Highly likely
Probability <1% 1% ‑ 5% 5% ‑ 25% 25% ‑ 50% >50%
The risks are then ranked and classified according to a multiple of the impact score and the likelihood of occurrence. Risks with an
overall score greater than twelve are classified as red risks and are to be reported twice a year to the Audit and Risk Committee.
Thetotal of all red risks scores is also to be tracked and reported twice a year to the Audit and Risk Committee.
Climate‑related risk management is incorporated in our Group risk management process, details for which can be found on
page42.
Climate‑related risk assessment
With support from a sustainability
consultant, we have conducted a
Company‑wide assessment of both
physical and transition risks and
opportunities, considering all TCFD
categories and their potential impacts
on our revenue, assets, supply chain and
other costs. These assessments cover
AppliedNutrition’s UK and USsites.
A bottom‑up, site‑level analysis
of physical risks was undertaken
using the Munich Re Location Risk
Intelligence Tool to map and identify
current and projected exposure to
physical climate‑related risks such as
flooding, sea level rise and tropical
cyclones.
A top‑down, strategic risk
assessment approach was taken to
identify transition risks. This was
undertaken via engagement with
management, desktop research
including consideration of existing and
proposed legislation and regulatory
requirements, and comparison against
nutritional supplement industry peers.
The identified risks and opportunities
were then assessed using the 5x4
matrix outlined above to align with the
Company’s overall risk management
framework and will be reviewed each
year in preparation for our TCFD
reporting requirements. Risks are
reported to the Audit and Risk Committee
on an annual basis at the October
meeting, with a focus on approving the
annual TCFD disclosures. A thorough
reassessment of climate‑related risks
and opportunities will be completed at
least once every three years.
Managing and monitoring
climate‑related risks and
opportunities
As we have only started work on our
climate‑related strategy we recognise
that there is more to do to evolve
and refine our approach. Our focus
will now be on fully embedding the
climate‑related risks and opportunities
we have identified into our emerging
risk management process. For each
risk and opportunity we have outlined
the initial steps we will take to mitigate
or capitalise on them and have defined
metrics that will enable us to track
progress. Over the coming year, we
will deepen our analysis and refine our
actions to ensure effective management.
26
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGY
Our approach to scenario analysis
We have assessed climate‑related risks
and opportunities against a variety
of scenarios. This has shown that, in
aggregate across all scenarios assessed,
the overall climate risk exposure is low,
and that we are financially resilient
and strategically robust to climate
change. The current understanding of
climate‑related risks is that any impacts
on assets is limited, and risks can be
accommodated within business‑as‑usual
activity considering existing and planned
mitigation strategies.
Risks are subject to ongoing refinement
and quantification over time, which allow
us to build a complete picture, enabling
the management of any climate‑related
risks to be incorporated into the ongoing
strategy. Analysis will continue to evolve
as new data becomes available, both
internally and externally, and we will
continue to monitor its climate exposures
and action plans through our risk
management framework.
Within our financial planning
process, weseek to comply with all
climate‑related regulatory requirements
through a materiality lens, ensuring
cost of compliance is kept under control.
Thisfinancial planning process also
identifies opportunities to reduce our
climate‑related impact.
The limitations and assumptions
ofscenario analysis are:
1. Scenarios often only provide
high‑level global and regional
forecasts.
2. Not all risks are easily subject to
scenario analysis.
3. Scenario analysis requires analysis
ofspecific factors and modelling them
with fixed assumptions.
4. It is assumed Applied Nutrition will
have the same carbon footprint and
the same business activities in the
future as are in place today.
5. Impacts should be considered in
the context of the current financial
performance and prices.
6. Impacts are assumed to occur without
responding with any mitigation
actions, which would reduce the
impact of risks.
7. Impacts are modelled to occur in
a linear fashion, when in practice
dramatic climate‑related impacts may
occur suddenly after tipping points
are breached.
8. The analysis considered each risk
and scenario in isolation, when in
practice climate‑related risks may
occur in parallel as part of wider set
of potential global impacts.
9. Carbon pricing was informed by the
Global Energy Outlook 2023 report
from the International Energy Agency
(IEA).
10. There will be opportunities in future
years to increase the sophistication
of modelling as new data is made
available both internally and
externally to support a meaningful
quantitative assessment.
Physical risks
We currently have two sites: our
headquarters and manufacturing facility
in Liverpool, UK, and our sales office in
the US. Recognising that rising global
temperatures and extreme weather
events may disrupt operations and
supply chains, we have used the Munich
Re Location Risk Intelligence Toolto
assess current and potential future
physical climate‑related risks at both
sites.
Three climate scenarios were selected
to provide a range of situations which
may impact the Group. The scenarios
are based on the IPCC’s Representative
Concentration Pathways (RCPs) mapped
to the latest IPCC AR6 report’s Shared
Socioeconomic Pathways (SSPs).
‘Net Zero 2050 Scenario’ RCP
2.6/ IPCC SSP1: which is associated
with a c.1.5°C temperature rise from
pre‑industrial times by the end of
thecentury;
‘Middle of the Road’ RCP 4.5/IPCC
SSP2: which is associated with a 2‑3°C
temperature rise from pre‑industrial
times by the end of the century; and
‘Hothouse World’ RCP 8.5/IPCC
SSP5: which is associated with a >4°C
temperature rise from pre‑industrial
times by the end of the century.
Based on a combination of event
likelihood, location materiality and
the potential financial impact, it
was concluded that there are no
climate‑related physical risks that are
material. However, to account for future
business growth, potential location
changes and climate projection models
uncertainty, a general risk of ‘damage
or disruption caused by physical climate
events’ has been included in our analysis.
On this basis, a low likelihood and a low
financial impact is assumed.
27
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
TASK FORCE ON CLIMATE-RELATED FINANCIALDISCLOSURES
CONTINUED
STRATEGY CONTINUED
Physical risks continued
Risk TCFD category Area Potential financial impact
Time
horizon Likelihood
Magnitude
of impact
Scenario
with largest
potential
impact
Damage or
disruption
caused by
physical
climate
events
Physical
(chronic
or acute)
Own
operations,
upstream or
downstream
Cost of asset damages
Increased insurance costs
associated with higher
exposure
Revenue losses from
disrupted operations
and downtime
Medium‑
Long
Remote Minor RCP 8.5
Transition risks and opportunities
The Group is exposed to risks and opportunities that result from the global transition to a low‑carbon economy. The speed of
this transition will determine the severity and impact of climate transition risks and opportunities. The TCFD defines transition
risks in four categories (Policy and Legal, Market, Technology, and Reputation) and transition opportunities in five categories
(ResourceEfficiency, Energy Source, Products and Services, Markets, and Resilience). The risks and opportunities have been
assessed at a gross level, meaning the impacts of the risks and opportunities assumed no mitigating actions are already in place.
Transitional climate‑related risks and opportunities were identified and assessed over the following time horizons to capture
the potentially longer timeframes in which they may manifest, the lifespan of our assets, as well as any longer‑term regulatory
changes.
Time horizons
Short (2024‑2027) Medium (2028‑2035) Long (2035‑2050)
Rationale In line with specific business
plan forecasting.
General intermediate time horizon
between short and long time
horizons in line with broader
market practices.
Long enough to encompass
long‑term industry and policy
trends, such as UK Net Zero 2050,
and for climate‑related risks
to manifest.
The following IEA climate‑related scenarios, looking forward to 2050, were applied to assess the behaviour of climate‑related
transition risks and opportunities. The IEA scenarios are far more descriptive and useful for modelling more positive climate
outcomes, so are appropriate for modelling transition risks.
Net Zero 2050 (NZE): an ambitious scenario which sets out a narrow but achievable pathway for the global energy sector to
achieve net zero CO
2
emissions by 2050, aligned with the TCFD’s ‘below 2°C’ requirement. It also informs the Science Based
Targets initiative (SBTi) pathways used to validate corporate net zero targets and ambition.
Stated Policies Scenario (STEPS): a scenario reflecting current policy measures, projecting a 2.5°C temperature rise by 2100
with a 50% probability. It outlines a combination of physical and transition risks and represents a base case pathway with a
trajectory implied by today’s policy settings.
28
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
Transition risks
Five key transition risks have been identified.
Risk TCFD category Area Potential financial impact
Time
horizon Likelihood
Magnitude
of impact
Scenario
with largest
potential
impact Mitigating actions
Carbon
pricing
exposure in
the value
chain
Regulation Upstream Price of carbon
related to GHG
emissions associated
with upstream value
chain increases
OPEX (manufacturing
of raw materials
and shipping).
Medium‑
Long
Likely Significant NZE Engage with
suppliers to
reduce Scope 3
emissions.
Virgin
plastic tax
schemes/
plastic
reduction
initiatives
Regulation Upstream Government
schemes to tax and
reduce virgin plastic
use will increase
costs associated with
continued use of
plastics or switching
to more sustainable
alternatives.
Medium‑
Long
Possible Minor NZE Minimise virgin
plastic usage
in packaging.
Changing
customer/
consumer
behaviour
Market Downstream Increasing demand
for non‑dairy
alternatives results
in reduced sales and
revenue from core
product offering.
Short‑
Medium
Possible Minor NZE Monitor market
trends and
consumer
preferences.
Increase range
of non‑dairy
alternatives to
meet changing
demand.
Shifting
customer/
investor
requirements
Reputation Own
operations/
downstream
Increasing
attention on climate
change drives up
spending required
to reduce impact
on environment.
Medium‑
Long
Possible Minor NZE Engage with
relevant
stakeholders
to understand
expectations.
Regulatory
compliance
Policy Own
operations
Incoming
sustainability
regulation will result
in additional costs
to remain compliant.
Medium‑
Long
Likely Minor NZE Monitor changes
to regulatory
landscape.
29
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
STRATEGY CONTINUED
Transition opportunities
Four key transition opportunities have been identified.
Opportunity TCFD category Area Potential financial impact
Time
horizon Likelihood
Magnitude
of impact
Scenario
with largest
potential
impact Mitigating actions
Energy
efficiency
Resource
Efficiency
Own
operations
Increased CAPEX
to implement
energy efficiency
improvements across
manufacturing,
warehousing and
office facilities.
Potential to reduce
long‑term OPEX.
Short‑
Medium
Likely Minor NZE Upgrading
to more
energy‑efficient
manufacturing
equipment.
LED lighting
improvements.
Higher efficiency
heating and
cooling systems.
Waste
efficiency
Resource
Efficiency
Own
operations
Increased CAPEX
and OPEX to
implement waste
improvement
initiatives.
Potentialto reduce
long‑term OPEX.
Medium‑
Long
Moderate Minor NZE Develop
lower waste
manufacturing
processes.
Introduce
office waste
reduction/
recycling
programmes.
Low‑carbon
energy
alternatives
Energy
Source
Own
operations
Increased OPEX to
source energy from
low‑carbon energy
sources.
Short‑
Medium
Likely Minor NZE Renewable
energy
installations.
Source
renewable
grid energy.
Low‑carbon
products
Products
and Services
Markets
Own
operations/
downstream
Increased costs
to develop and
manufacture
low‑carbon products.
Potential to increase
revenue from
new markets.
Medium‑
Long
Likely Major STEPS Develop
low‑carbon
product lines.
TASK FORCE ON CLIMATE-RELATED FINANCIALDISCLOSURES
CONTINUED
30
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
METRICS AND TARGETS
In line with the Streamlined Energy and Carbon Reporting (SECR) reporting requirements, we have reported our Scope 1
and2 greenhouse gas emissions, Scope 1 and 2 intensity, and energy consumption on page 22. Greenhouse gas emissions are
calculated and reported in accordance with the Greenhouse Gas Protocol Corporate Accounting and Reporting Standard.
Having identified the key climate‑related risks and opportunities, we have identified the following metrics against each risk and
opportunity, which will allow us to track and monitor our exposure, ensuring risks do not exceed acceptable levels and that
opportunities are appropriately capitalised upon.
Ahead of our first year of reporting, our initial focus has been on establishing our Scope 1 and 2 footprint in order to comply with
SECR requirements. We will now focus on establishing our Scope 3 footprint, after which we will be able to consider establishing
climate‑related targets. We will also focus on measuring against all the metrics detailed below to enhance future reporting.
Against each of the identified risks, we intend to monitor the following metrics:
RISK METRIC TO TRACK
Carbon pricing exposure in the value chain Cost of carbon prices paid
Virgin plastic tax Virgin plastic consumption
Cost of virgin plastic taxes paid
Changing customer/consumer behaviour Sales of dairy and non‑dairy,
and other low‑carbon productlines
Scope 1 and 2 emissions
Shifting customer/investor requirements Scope 1 and 2 emissions
ESG rating agency scores
Regulatory compliance Compliance costs associated with
sustainability‑focusedregulation
Against each of the identified opportunities, we intend to monitor the following metrics:
OPPORTUNITY METRIC TO TRACK
Energy efficiency Total energy consumption
Energy intensity (per £m revenue)
Scope 1 and 2 emissions
Waste efficiency Waste disposal to landfill and recycling
Low‑carbon energy alternatives Scope 1 and 2 emissions
Low‑carbon products Sales of dairy and non‑dairy,
and other low‑carbon product lines
Applied Nutrition does not currently have any climate‑related targets.
READ MORE ON SECR ON PAGE 22
31
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
ENGAGING WITH STAKEHOLDERS
TODELIVER OUR VISION
STAKEHOLDER
ENGAGEMENT
AND S172
Section 172 (1) statement
The Directors of Applied Nutrition plc (the “Group”) recognise
that the success of the Group is dependent on its rich network
of stakeholders, each of which is critical to the business’s
ability to deliver on its strategy. The Directors confirm that,
in accordance with section 172 (1) of the Companies Act 2006
(the “Act”), they have discharged their duty to act in the way
they consider, in good faith, to be most likely to promote the
success of the Group for the benefit of shareholders while
also having regard to these key stakeholder groups and other
considerations. These are set out in the Act as:
the likely consequence of any decision in the long term;
the interest of the Group’s employees;
the need to foster the Group’s business relationships with
suppliers, customers and others;
the impact of the Group’s operations on the community and
the environment;
the desirability of the Group maintaining a reputation for high
standards of business conduct; and
the need to act fairly between members of the Group.
The Board’s understanding of the interests of the Group’s
stakeholders is informed by the programme of stakeholder
engagement described on pages 32 to 37. Examples of how
theDirectors have discharged their section 172 duty when
taking principal decisions during the year are set out on pages
36 and 37.
Engaging with stakeholders to deliver our vision
Our long‑term relationships with stakeholders are
fundamentalto delivering our vision to become the
world’s mosttrusted and innovative sports nutrition,
healthandwellness brand.
We have identified six major stakeholder groups and
understandthe importance of regular engagement with
thesegroups to ensure their needs and interests are
considered in the Board’s key decision‑making.
Information
gathering stage
pre decision
BOARD
DECISION
STAKEHOLDER
FEEDBACK
Pre decision, considering
stakeholder interests
Post decision,
monitoring outcomes
Stakeholder symbols Section 172 considerations
Consumers
A
Likely long‑term
consequences
Customers
B
Employee
interests
Suppliers
C
Relationships with customers,
suppliers and others
Employees
D
Impact on the community
and environment
Investors
E
Maintaining a reputation for high
standards of business conduct
Community
F
Acting fairly between
members of the Group
32
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
OUR STAKEHOLDERS
Consumers
We have developed four product
ranges which target a wide range of
consumers: professional athletes who
use sports nutrition products daily,
serious gym-goers, fitness enthusiasts,
and everyday health-conscious
consumers looking to improve their
health or manage their weight.
Why we engage
To ensure that we understand the
end consumers’ evolving needs and
deliver on our purpose to continually
develop trusted products and respond
to new trends through innovation.
What matters to them
Trusted, innovative and high‑quality
products which support their
day‑to‑day nutritional, wellness,
health and performance needs.
How we engage
Attendance at worldwide exhibitions to
showcase product range and engage
directly with the end consumer.
Use of social media channels
toinform and engage with the
endconsumer.
Review of relevant market insights,
data and analysis to understand
consumer trends and inform new
product development.
Direct engagement with the end
consumer through gym visits and
sampling events.
Outcomes of engagement
Continued development of new
product innovations to meet existing
and new consumer needs.
Customers
Our primarily B2B model is
underpinned by long-term strategic
relationships with grocers, specialty
retailers, international distributors,
gyms and sports clubs.
Why we engage
To develop and maintain long‑term
strategic relationships through
ongoing engagement, investment
andsharing of information.
What matters to them
Innovative and high‑quality products
that meet required technical and food
safety standards, delivered with high
levels of service.
How we engage
CEO and COO manage the relationship
and regularly engage with key
customers and report back to the
Board in terms of progress, outcomes
and opportunities.
Day‑to‑day collaborative engagement
across Sales, Marketing, Admin and
R&D teams.
Sampling events to showcase our
product range and engage directly
with retail teams.
Attendance at worldwide exhibitions
to meet existing distributors and
showcase the Group to potential
newcustomers.
Compliance with customer audits,
where required.
Maintenance of the highest standards
of manufacturing and quality such
as BRC‑GS Global Food Safety
certification, the HACCP Food Safety
certification, the GMP certification,
FDA accreditation and ISO 22000:
2018 – Food Safety Management.
Outcomes of engagement
Investment in a manufacturing
extension, increasing capacity to
grow revenues to over £200 million.
High standards of production
maintained
as evidenced by
BRC AA+ rating.
Suppliers
We have a well-established and
trusted network of global suppliers,
with whom we partner to ensure safe,
reliable and responsible sourcing.
Why we engage
To maintain high supplier standards,
continuity of supply and competitive
pricing whilst seeking new ways to
collaborate and innovate, and ensure
suppliers conduct their business in an
ethical and responsible manner.
What matters to them
Collaborations underpinned by
fairness, trust and transparency
which create further opportunities
togrow our businesses together.
Prompt payment, in line with
agreedterms.
How we engage
Regular on‑site meetings are held
with key suppliers.
Supplier feedback is monitored and
provided to the Executive Directors
who update the Board at regular
intervals.
Set expectations through use
of comprehensive on‑boarding
assessment for new suppliers, which
includes audit of our suppliers’ ethical
and environmental policies.
Sharing of policies such as our
Ethical Trading and Modern Slavery
statement to ensure transparency
ofexpectations.
Open, direct dialogue regarding
invoice queries and payment practices
reporting submitted in line with
requirements.
Outcomes of engagement
Sourcing of safe, quality raw materials
that meet our high standards of food
safety, technical compliance and
support product innovations.
33
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
STAKEHOLDER ENGAGEMENT AND S172
CONTINUED
OUR STAKEHOLDERS CONTINUED
Employees
Applied Nutrition has over 250
employees, representing a multitude
of nationalities, each of whom play a
critical role in delivering our vision.
Throughout the IPO process,
employees were kept informed of
the Group’s plans and progress
through a series of business‑wide
communications.
All employees were invited to
participate in the IPO and become
shareholders in Applied Nutrition plc.
Outcomes of engagement
The Group does not make use
of zero‑hour contracts and the
lowest‑earning staff are paid 10%
above minimum wage, increasing
to16% after six months of service.
Non‑management staff are paid an
enhanced rate for all overtime work.
Taking account of the fact that
Portuguese is the native language
for over 50% of our employees, all
Group‑wide announcements are
made in English and Portuguese
to ensure important messaging is
communicated and understood by all.
Why we engage
To ensure all employees feel valued,
are given an opportunity to provide
feedback and play a part in shaping
the future of the Group.
What matters to them
Fair salary and benefits, against a
backdrop of cost‑of‑living pressures.
An inclusive and diverse workplace
where everyone’s views are listened
to and are of equal importance.
Job security and satisfaction, provided
in a safe working environment.
How we engage
Our ‘Applied Nutrition Team’
WhatsApp group allows immediate
communication between all
employees and acts as a mechanism
for direct feedback between staff
and the Executive Directors.
All‑employee surveys undertaken
to gauge employee engagement.
Designated Non‑Executive Director
for workforce engagement.
Development of a Culture Dashboard
in order for the Board to monitor
employee culture and engagement.
On‑site presence; our head
office, manufacturing facility and
warehousing are all at one location
in Knowsley and our Executive
Directors are on site five days a
week, regularly walking the site
andengaging directly with staff.
Investors
Our investor community consists of
existing and prospective institutional/
retail shareholders, research analysts,
investment banks, ratings agencies
and employees.
Why we engage
To provide a transparent, clear and
consistent explanation of how we aim
to deliver growth and create value.
What matters to them
Clearly articulated growth strategy.
Responsible and sustainable value
creation.
Transparent communication from an
experienced Board of Directors with
the opportunity fordirect, personal
contact on a regular basis.
How we engage
Multiple opportunities for investors
and analysts to engage directly
withExecutive Directors throughout
IPO process.
Investor roadshows twice a year
following the Group’s half‑year
andyear‑end results, including site
visits and tours at the headquarters.
Recorded webcast presentations
ofthe half‑year and year‑end results
made available.
Regular attendance at conferences to
meet new and prospective investors.
Access to Annual Report and
Accounts, presentations and all IPO
documents via the Investors section
ofthe Group’s PLC website.
Meetings held in multiple cities in
the US and Europe to ensure we are
engaging with international investors.
Outcomes of engagement
Engagement with investors pre and
post IPO has influenced our capital
allocation policy.
34
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
Community
We are a global business with a strong
sense of local pride; forging close ties
with the council, charities, schools and
community projects in the Knowsley
region.
Outcomes of engagement
During the last twelve months,
our charitable efforts have raised
£165,000 for Alder Hey Children’s
Hospital, Liverpool.
Over 25% of our employees have
taken part in charitable events
orchallenges over the last
twelvemonths.
Recognition through Knowsley
Business Awards since 2018,
reflecting contributions made to the
local economy and the rapid growth of
the Group: Small Business of the Year
(2018), High Growth Business of the
Year (2019), Medium Business of the
Year (2022) and International Trade
Award (2024).
We contributed towards the extension
and improvement of the facilities at
Acorn Community Farm, which is just
up the road from our manufacturing
facilities.
Why we engage
To build strong relationships which
result in a positive impact on local
people’s lives, the economy and
environment.
What matters to them
Partnerships with local businesses
who make meaningful contributions
towards their goals for a better
society; through creation of job
opportunities, support for community
initiatives and local charities.
How we engage
Providing opportunities for employees
to take part in charitable events,
including the Coniston Challenge,
Tough Mudder, Manchester Half
Marathon and Oli’s Safari Walk in
Knowsley.
Key sponsor of the Manchester
Half Marathon, attended by 24,000
participants with 1,000s of free
samples handed out on the day.
Sponsorship of new sports kits for
a local school in Kirkby, presented
in person by our CEO and COO;
supporting young athletes to
achieve their goals and investing
in the future of our local community.
GROWING APPLIED
NUTRITION FROM
OUR ROOTS IN THIS
AMAZING COMMUNITY
HAS BEEN A PRIVILEGE,
AND OUR SUCCESS IS
DEEPLY CONNECTED
TO THE DEDICATION
AND TALENT OF THE
LOCAL PEOPLE WHO
HELP BRING OUR
VISION TO LIFE.
Thomas Ryder
Founder and CEO of Applied Nutrition
Fundraising for Alder Hey.
35
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
STAKEHOLDER ENGAGEMENT AND S172
CONTINUED
KEY BOARD DECISIONS IN FY25
THE IPO SIGNIFICANTLY
ENHANCES THE FUTURE
PROSPECTS OF THE
BUSINESS.
LISTING APPLIED NUTRITION
ON THE LONDON STOCK EXCHANGE
During 2024, the Board took the decision to pursue a stock
exchange listing through an Initial Public Offering (IPO).
This process concluded on 24 October 2024 when Applied
Nutrition plc was admitted to the Main Market of the London
Stock Exchange and new shareholders were welcomed
to thebusiness.
STAKEHOLDERS IMPACTED
Investors Employees Customers
Consumers Suppliers
SECTION 172 CONSIDERATIONS
A
– The Board believes that the
public listing provides a platform for
the long‑term growth aspirations of
the Group by elevating the profile of
Applied Nutrition and our recognition
within the industry. The IPO gave
us the opportunity to become one
of the leading, publicly listed sports
nutrition, health and wellness brands
and significantly enhances the future
prospects of the business.
C
– The IPO presented an exciting and
unique opportunity to strengthen our
relationship with key customers and
the end consumer; giving them the
chance to buy into a brand that they
love and become truly invested in our
future success together.
B
– The Board considered how
employees might react to this
significant change in the Group’s
ownership. Employees were kept
informed through Group‑wide
communications at key points in the
journey to listing and ultimately invited
to participate in the IPO. This exciting
milestone in the Group’s journey was
shared with employees, giving the
opportunity to reflect and celebrate our
growth over the last ten years and look
forward to an exciting future for all.
E
– The IPO opened up the Group
to a programme of due diligence as
part of the IPO process, in addition to
significant ongoing public disclosure
scrutiny and requirements. The Board
considers and recognises that this is
a positive for the Group as a whole to
have met, and continue to meet, these
high standards of business.
D
– The Board considered the impact
on the wider business community in
the North‑West and recognised the
positive impact a stock exchange
listing would have on the profile of all
local enterprise, reflecting the high
standards of business and drive for
growth in the region.
Thomas Ryder
Founder and CEO of Applied Nutrition
Section 172 considerations
A
Likely long‑term consequences
B
Employee interests
C
Relationships with customers,
suppliers and others
D
Impact on the community
and environment
E
Maintaining a reputation for high
standards of business conduct
F
Acting fairly between
members of the Group
36
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
APPOINTMENT OF
NON-EXECUTIVE
DIRECTORS
In June 2025, two further independent
Non‑Executive Directors were appointed
to the Board:
Peter Cowgill – A distinguished business
leader with a proven track record in the
retail and consumer sectors, Peter joined
the Board to help drive commercial
performance and provide the Board with
additional experience of operating in a
plc environment; and
Deepti Velury Bakhshi – A seasoned
transformation leader with a strong track
record driving profitability, Deepti joined
the Board to help guide the Group in
leadership, marketing and AI. In addition,
Deepti was appointed as the member
of the Board with responsibility for
workforce engagement.
STAKEHOLDERS IMPACTED
Investors Employees Customers
SECTION 172 CONSIDERATIONS
A
– The Board believes that the
appointments of Peter and Deepti bring
a wealth of additional experience to the
Board in several areas, both traditionally
important (commercial improvement,
operating in a plc environment), in
addition to emerging areas (data, AI).
Asa result of these appointments, the
Board considers that long‑term growth
and shareholder value will be delivered.
B
– The Board believes that our
employees are critical in delivering the
vision of the Group and therefore want
to ensure that employees are happy,
engaged and motivated to deliver
growth. As a result, the Board has asked
Deepti to take the lead in monitoring
workforce engagement. The Board
believes Deepti’s appointment will serve
to improve employee engagement.
E
– The appointment of these two
Directors moves the Group closer to
fully complying (without the need for
explanations) with the requirements of
the Corporate Governance Code in the
following ways:
the number of independent
Non‑Executive Directors now means
that at least half the Board, excluding
the Chair, are Non‑Executive Directors
whom the Board considers to be
independent;
a new Non‑Executive Director
appointedfor workforce engagement
with extensive experience in the
relevant area;
the appointments mean that an
increased proportion of the Board
is made up of women (in addition to the
fact that a senior Board position is held
by a woman); and
the Group now meets the requirement
for a member of the Board to be of an
ethnic minority background.
I AM DELIGHTED TO
WELCOME DEEPTI AND
PETER TO THE BOARD.
IT IS TESTAMENT TO
THE STRENGTH OF THE
APPLIED NUTRITION
BRAND THAT WE HAVE
BEEN ABLE TO SECURE
TWO APPOINTMENTS
OF THIS STATURE.
Andy Bell
Chair of Applied Nutrition plc
37
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
GROUP FINANCIAL
REVIEW
The Group’s financial performance for the year ended 31 July 2025 is reported in accordance with UK‑adopted international
accounting standards and applicable law.
Group results overview
The Board measures and judges the financial performance of the Group predominantly on the following key performance
indicators which cover both profitability and cash generation
1
:
FY25 FY24 Change
Revenue (£m) 107.1 86.2 24.2%
Gross profit (£m) 49.3 41.3 19.4%
Adjusted EBITDA (£m) 30.9 26.0 18.8%
Adjusted profit before tax (£m) 30.2 25.7 17.5%
Adjusted basic and diluted EPS (p) 9.1 8.0 13.8%
Free cash flow (£m) 16.5 7.1 132.4%
Free cash flow conversion 72.4% 35.3% 105.1%
Statutory results
Operating profit (£m) 28.1 23.7 18.6%
Profit before taxation (£m) 28.5 24.3 17.3%
Basic and diluted EPS (p) 8.4 7.5 12.0%
Calculations for adjusted measures are shown on pages 39, 41 and 108.
Revenue
FY25 revenue has been driven by growth across each of our key regions, and we continue to benefit from our B2B business model
as well as continued growth of our D2C offering.
Geography FY25 FY24 Change
UK £48.4m £33.6m +44.0%
Europe £15.6m £10.7m +45.8%
International £43.1m £41.9m +2.9%
Group revenue increased 24.2% to £107.1 million (FY24: £86.2 million). The Company did not make any acquisitions or disposals
during the period and therefore all revenue growth is organic. H2 FY25 delivered approximately £60 million of revenue, reflecting
timing of customer orders (H2 FY24: £40.8 million).
THE PERFORMANCE REFLECTS
THE STRENGTH OF OUR STRATEGY,
DISCIPLINED EXECUTION AND GROWING
TRACTION IN THE MARKET.”
Joe Pollard
Chief Financial Officer
1. The financial information included in this review includes alternative performance measures (APMs) that are not recognised under IFRS and are unaudited. The Directors
believe that these non‑IFRS measures provide useful information with respect to the performance of the Group’s business and operations.
38
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
All geographies saw an increase in sales
during the year. UK sales grew by 44%
aswe continued to see exciting growth
as a result of the strategy to diversify
channels, invest in relationships with
key customers, and work to increase
the penetration of the BodyFuel and
Endurance ranges as they mature.
Europe grew by 46% in the year as
we invested in growing partnerships
with retailers and distributors in key
countries such as France, Spain, the
Netherlands andGermany. International
sales grew 3%; however, now the Group
has emerged from distributor and
registration changes in the Middle East,
this geography is expected to grow more
in FY26. International sales in the second
half of the financial year were 19% higher
than the first half, and excluding the
sales made to the distributor who we
exited a partnership with, sales grew
by13% between FY24 and FY25.
Gross profit
Gross profit increased 19.1% to
£49.2million (FY24: £41.3 million).
All adjustments noted by the Group
within the financial statements were
in administrative expenses and
therefore noadjustment to gross
profitisnecessary.
Total gross margin was down 190bps
at 46.0% (FY24: 47.9%) with the decline
reflecting a small non‑structural change
in the product mix of the Group, along
with high raw material prices in the whey
protein category. Whey protein continues
to be a relatively small part of the
Group’s revenue (FY25: 19%).
However, the average price of whey
protein purchased by the Company in
FY25 was c.30% higher than purchased
in FY24. At the end of FY25 whey prices
were generally considered to have been
at historically high levels.
While the Group purchases a significant
number of raw materials outside of
whey protein, none are considered to be
particularly volatile, which has meant
that movement in gross margin has been
relatively small, and even smaller with
whey price changes excluded.
The Group benefitted from a 70bps
reduction in direct staff costs as a
percentage of revenue. This was driven
by the new manufacturing extension
completed during the year which
increased manufacturing efficiency.
Thebenefit of these efficiencies was after
the effect of an increase in direct staff
hourly rates.
Administrative expenses adjusted
for exceptional and non‑underlying
items
In FY25 total administrative expenses
adjusted for exceptional and
non‑underlying items were 18.2% of
revenue (FY24: 18.8%) showing an increase
of 20.4% against an increase in revenue of
24.2% highlighting benefits in two areas:
increased general efficiencies as we
become a larger business and continue
to ensure we drive value for money
across the business, including in the
overhead base, while still investing in
key areas; and
as a result of preparing to IPO the
business, we made various investments
in the overhead base to ensure it was
robust to withstand being a listed
business ahead of time, therefore the
growth in cost in certain areas was not
as significant.
Offset against these were the additional
ongoing costs of being a listed business,
for which we saw almost a full year of
impact in FY25. These costs have been
well managed and the proforma impact
as we move into FY26 is not expected to
be significant.
Spend on marketing, advertising and
partner incentives, which are recognised
as an expense in the accounts rather
than being netted off revenue, was the
same percentage of revenue as in FY24.
Adjusted EBITDA and adjusted
EBITDA margin
A reconciliation between operating
profit and adjusted EBITDA is shown
below. Adjusted EBITDA rose in the
period by 18.8% to £30.9 million
(FY24:£26.0million). EBITDA margin
of29% for FY25 (FY24: 30%) was in line
withguidance at the time of IPO, where
we noted a small reduction expected as
a result of the additional costs of being a
listed business.
Exceptional and
non‑underlying items
Exceptional and non‑underlying items
forthe period resulted in a charge of
£1.7million (FY24: charge of £1.4million).
These items in FY25 all related to the
costs of the IPO of the Group. There
are not expected to be any charges in
relation to the IPO inFY26.
EBITDA and EBITDA margin
Year ended
31 July 2025
£m
Year ended
31 July 2024
£m
Operating profit 28.1 23.7
Costs relating to IPO 1.7 1.2
Share‑based payment expense 0.2
Adjusted operating profit 29.8 25.1
Depreciation and amortisation 1.1 0.9
Adjusted EBITDA 30.9 26.0
39
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
GROUP FINANCIAL
REVIEW
CONTINUED
Items between adjusted EBITDA and profit before tax
Year ended
31 July 2025
£m
Year ended
31 July 2024
£m
Adjusted EBITDA 30.9 26.0
Costs relating to IPO (1.7) (1.2)
Share‑based payment expense (0.2)
Presented EBITDA 29.2 24.6
Depreciation and amortisation (1.1) (0.9)
Finance income 0.5 0.7
Finance expense (0.1) (0.1)
Profit before tax 28.5 24.3
The following items affected the profit
before tax figures but not EBITDA:
depreciation and amortisation rose
compared to FY24 as a result of the
additional fixed assets;
interest income relates to cash the
Group holds on deposit. In FY25 it
declined by £0.2 million to £0.5 million
as a result of reduced interest rates
in FY25 compared to FY24, and also
a lower average cash balance after
the dividend declared in October2024
(£14.7million); and
interest expense.
Tax
The Group’s main tax exposure is to the
UK, which has a general corporation tax
rate of 25%. The Group’s effective rate
of taxation during the year was 26.0%
(FY24: 23.0%), higher than the standard
rate of corporation tax predominantly as
a result of costs relating to the IPO that
are not deductible for tax in the UK.
Cash flow and cash flow conversion
Net cash generated from operations
Net cash generated from operations
increased by 33.5% to £21.9 million
(FY24: £16.4 million). The Group’s
working capital usage (defined as
inventories, plus trade and other
receivables, less trade and other
payables) at the end of the year was
£33.1million (FY24: £27.3million).
This increase of 21.2% was slightly below
the increase in revenue as a result of
careful working capital management
in comparison to the growth of the
business. Management continue to
manage capital expenditure, balancing:
the need to ensure we have a good
supply of raw materials on hand so
that disruptions in global shipping
(e.g. the ‘Red Sea Crisis’) to not disrupt
production and that the Company has
adequate stocks of raw materials in
order to ensure it is able to quickly
react to customer orders;
assisting our customers and
distribution partners to grow by
ensuring we enable them to keep a
sensible supply of our products in
stock, and we do not restrict our own
growth with restrictive credit terms,
sensibly balanced against the credit
risk to the Group; and
appropriate payment terms of
suppliers, ensuring that we drive
the best value we can to maximise
marginssince the Group is in a net
cash position.
Other material cash flow items
Income tax paid
The tax paid in FY25 reduced to
£6.3million compared to £9.7million in
FY24. The Group became a ‘very large’
company in relation to corporation
tax in the UK for the first time in the
FY24 financial period. This meant that
tax paid during FY24 incorporated the
estimate of all corporation tax due for
FY24 in addition to any amounts due for
FY23 that were paid in FY24 when the
Company was notdeemed to be ‘very
large’ for corporation tax.
For FY25, the Company continued to be a
‘very large’ company for the purposes of
corporation tax and is therefore required
to pay its estimated corporation tax bill
for the relevant financial year wholly
within the said financial year.
Purchase of tangible fixed assets
As indicated at IPO, the Company
spent approximately £1.0million on
capital expenditure during FY25 (FY24:
£1.0million) as we continued to expand
our capabilities and certain specialist
capacity. The most significant areas of
spend in FY25 were:
investment in a new stick packaging
machine; as a result of the successful
launch of products in more convenient
formats such as stick packs and
increased consumer demand in this
area, the Company purchased a
machine which allows stick packaging
in this format. Currently, the Company
produces the powder and then sends
it to third‑party service providers to
place in stick packs; bringing this
service in‑house will increase margins,
reduce reliance on third‑party service
providers, and allow us to bring
products in this format to market
quicker. This machinery was purchased
in FY25, but will be delivered and
commissioned in FY26; and
towards the end of FY25, as a result
of the increased demand for capsules
and tablets, the Company invested in a
new filling machine in order to ensure
capacity would meet expected future
demand. In early FY26 this machinery
was commissioned and completed,
although the capital expenditure was
accounted for in FY25.
40
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
As outlined in the Chief Executive
Officer’s review, over the next
18months the Group intends to invest
approximately £2.0‑£2.5 million to
ensure the business has the operations
to support its continued expansion,
drive efficiencies within the business,
in addition to bringing in‑house some
currently outsourced production and
services which will also enhance margin
and reduce reliance on outsourced
providers.
In addition, the Company is considering
an investment into machinery that
will allow us to produce one of our
fastest‑growing products in‑house.
Thisis a more expensive addition
with apotential cost of approximately
£2.5million to install.
Also as outlined in the Chief Executive
Officer’s review, in early FY27 we expect
to be able to move into a new global
distribution facility and head office.
Itisexpected that the Company will lease
this property from the landlord, which
will be a corporate entity controlled by
the Chief Executive Officer and Chief
Operating Officer. The Board considered
whether it would have been better for
the Company to have purchased the land
and construct the proposed new building.
However, given the risks associated with
such a capital undertaking, and these
risks being outside of the interests of
the Company’s shareholders, the Board
believes a long‑lease of such a building,
with an appropriate break‑clause in
favour of the Company, will provide
the Company more flexibility, but with
an adequate level of security to plan
for future years, and is therefore more
appropriate. To avoid any perceived
conflict of interest, the Company is being
advised by an independent law firm and
independent Chartered Surveyor with no
connection to the Chief Executive Officer
or Chief Operating Officer. In addition, the
Chief Executive Officer or Chief Operating
Officer will not vote on approval of the
lease when it is finalised and the Chief
Financial Officer will sign the lease on
behalf of the Company with approval of
the Board. In October 2025, the Board
approved in principle the proposed
transaction and associated capital spend,
subject to appropriate review of final
documentation.
This constitutes a related party
transaction as defined by the UK Listing
Rules and the Company will provide
further details once the transaction is
finalised.
Dividend
The dividend during the year of
£14.7million (FY24: £nil) was declared
in October 2024 prior to the IPO of
the Company. The Company does not
anticipate declaring afurther dividend
before FY27, thereby retaining cash for
investment in capacity, efficiency and
potential M&A opportunities.
Free cash flow and free cash
flowconversion
The following is a reconciliation
between net increase in cash and
cash equivalents as presented in the
consolidated statement of cash flows of
the Group and free cash flow/free cash
flow conversion:
Year ended
31 July 2025
£m
Year ended
31 July 2024
£m
Net increase in
cash and cash
equivalents 0.1 5.9
IPO costs 1.7 1.2
Dividends 14.7
Free cash flow 16.5 7.1
Free cash flow
conversion 72.4% 35.3%
Free cash flow conversion measures free
cash flow as a percentage of adjusted
profit after tax, which is calculated as:
Year ended
31 July 2025
£m
Year ended
31 July 2024
£m
Statutory
profit after tax 21.1 18.7
Costs relating
to IPO 1.7 1.2
Share‑based
payment
expense 0.2
Adjusted profit
after tax 22.8 20.1
Liquidity and banking facilities
The Group continues to hold a
£10.0million revolving cash facility
withits main bankers (The Royal Bank
of Scotland plc). While the Group
currently has no need to draw down on
the facility, should there be a significant
cash requirement (e.g. in the event of
M&A), it would allow the business to
deploy cash quickly. However, given
the Group’scontinued cash generation,
thecost/benefit of such a facility will be
reviewed in FY26.
Cash within the Company’s main GBP
bank account earns interest at a rate
management believe is a reasonable
return for the flexibility of not having
cash on term deposits. Generally, the
Company does not hold significant
amounts of cash in currencies other than
GBP, except for USD, which is generally
not more than 20% of the total cash the
Company holds at any one time.
Joe Pollard
Chief Financial Officer
41
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
RISK
MANAGEMENT
PRINCIPAL RISKS AND
UNCERTAINTIES
Governance
The Board has overall responsibility for
oversight of risk and for maintaining
a robust risk management system.
The Group’s Audit and Risk Committee
(ARC) supports the Board with the
management of risk, with the day‑to‑day
management delegated by the Board to
the Executive Committee. The Executive
Committee meets biannually to review
the risk register, engaging with senior
departmental managers to capture and
report their risk updates to the ARC.
Our governance structure is
summarisedbelow.
Given the Company’s continued growth,
an external provider was appointed to
provide an outsourced internal audit
function during the financial year.
Further information on this can be found
in the ARC report on page 65.
Risk management policy objectives
Our risk management policy objectives
are to:
embed risk management into the
culture of the Company;
raise awareness and work with
partners, suppliers, customers and staff
to develop a common understanding
of the Company’s expectations on risk
management;
integrate risk management into policy,
planning and decision‑making; and
enable the Company to anticipate
and respond to changing social,
environmental and legislative
conditions.
These objectives will be achieved by:
identifying, assessing and effectively
managing strategic and operational
risks across the Company;
establishing clear roles, responsibilities
and reporting lines for risk
management across the Company;
incorporating the assessment of
risk into all key decision‑making and
planning processes of the Company;
and
using appropriate software and
reporting for recording, assessment,
monitoring of controls and reporting
ofrisks.
Risk management process
1. Risk identification in line with
strategic objectives: considering any
factors that could have a significant
effect on the Company’s ability to
deliver its strategy.
2. Risk assessment and evaluation:
considering all situations where
a principal risk could occur, the
potential impact it could have and the
likelihood of it occurring.
3. Risk mitigation: detailing any actions
undertaken or controls that have
been established and implemented to
manage the principal risks identified.
The ARC monitors and challenges
progress against risks, recommending
further mitigation actions where
appropriate.
4. Risk monitoring and review: regular
assessments undertaken by risk
owners to update the risk register for
any changes. Risk register is reviewed
at each ARC meeting with an annual
discussion and review at Board level.
EFFECTIVE RISK MANAGEMENT IS
KEY TO RUNNING OUR BUSINESS.
OUR RISK APPETITE DRIVES OUR
DECISION-MAKING, ENSURING OUR
REPUTATION, ASSETS AND STAFF ARE
PROTECTED, WHILE ALLOWING US
TO CONTINUE DELIVERING AGAINST
OUR STRATEGY.
Joe Pollard
Chief Financial Officer
BOARD LEVEL
Overall responsibility for establishing the degree of risk the Company is
willing to take to deliver its strategic objectives
AUDIT AND RISK COMMITTEE
Monitors and challenges progress against risks, guiding on mitigating actions
EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE
Responsible for the day‑to‑day management of risks and opportunities
OPERATIONAL LEVEL
Senior departmental managers, responsible for adopting and implementing
risk mitigation measures
Operations/strategy
Risks, progress and metrics
42
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
Identification of risks
The Group operates in an environment that is exposed to a wide range of internal and external risks that could have a material
impact on our strategy, operations, financial performance and reputation.
We continue to develop our risk management process and how we identify principal risks to include in our risk register. The initial
risk register categorises all existing and emerging risks, with the register covering the probability of the risk occurring and the
degree of the potential impact.
The risk register also identifies an owner for each risk, any current risk management or mitigation steps, and outlines proposed
further actions. This process has been in place throughout the year and is subject to an annual review by the Board to ensure that
risks are appropriately mitigated and aligned with risk appetite. In respect of the year ended 31 July 2025, the Board considered
that these processes remained effective.
Evaluation of risks
The Board and ARC consider all risks that may impede the achievement of the Company’s strategic objectives. The risk register is
maintained and reviewed as a standing item at each ARC meeting and is formally presented to the Board for review annually.
Risk appetite
The Board recognises the need to take informed risks to enable sustainable and profitable growth. The Board has reviewed the
overall approach to establishing risk appetite and has considered it for each risk. The risk appetite for the Company informs the
risk management process and its day‑to‑day activities.
Principal risks and uncertainties
All risks are assessed on a 5x4 matrix incorporating an assessment of the likelihood of occurrence and the potential impact on the
business were they to occur, as well as the extent to which they are being addressed and mitigated.
In combination, this information enables the identification of principal risks, which allows the Board to identify and monitor risks in
the context of overall strategy. In addition, it helps in the determination of the management treatment of risks and helps prioritise
resources in managing the most material climate‑related risks. Risks are subject to continual refinement and quantification over
time, which assists in any required incorporation of risks into the Group’s overall budgeting, strategy and financial statements.
Risk likelihood of occurrence is defined under five categories:
RATING 1 2 3 4 5
Criteria Remote Unlikely Possible Likely Highly likely
Probability <1% 1% – 5% 5% – 25% 25% – 50% >50%
Potential financial impacts (based on a profit or liability impact) associated with the risk impacts are defined as follows:
SCORE 1 2 3 4
Impact Minor Significant Major Critical
Financial measure
Impact or
lost opportunity
of <£0.5m
Impact or
lost opportunity
of £0.5m‑£1.0m
Impact or
lost opportunity
of £1.0m‑£2.0m
Impact or
lost opportunity
of >£2m
The risks are then ranked and classified according to a multiple of the impact score and the likelihood of occurrence. The ARC
actively discusses the red risks twice per year in more detail.
On the following pages is the Board’s view of the current risks to the Company and the impact they may have, as well as how
these risks are being managed. The Board has undertaken a robust assessment of the current risk register and no new principal
risks have been identified in the year.
The Board recognises the Group is exposed to wider risks than those listed, but has disclosed those that are likely to have the
biggest impact on the delivery of the Company’s strategic objectives. The risk factors described below are not an exhaustive list
or explanation of all risks relating to the Group and should be used as guidance only. Additional risks and uncertainties relating
to the Group that are not currently known to the Directors, or that the Directors currently deem immaterial, may individually or
cumulatively also have a material adverse impact on the Group’s business, results of operations, financial condition or prospects.
43
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
Principal risks and uncertainties continued
PRODUCT SAFETY AND QUALITY
Risk description
Unidentified quality issues
with raw materials or a
failure to follow appropriate
manufacturing processes may
result in inferior, harmful or
non-compliant products being
supplied to our customers.
Potential impact
Any product quality issues or product non‑
compliance with accreditation standards could
be damaging to the Group’s reputation and could
impact its ability to provide certain products to
customers. In turn, this could adversely impact the
Group’s business and financial position.
Mitigation
The majority of products are designed,
formulated, blended and packaged at the Group’s
own state‑of‑the‑art manufacturing facility in
Knowsley. A team of experts and accomplished
sports nutritionists leads thisprocess.
Products which have outsourced or elements
of outsourced production are performed by
suppliers who have been vetted as satisfactory
and meeting any required regulatory or
certification standards.
A strong regime of food safety and quality
checks are adhered to as part of internal
control processes. These are aligned to the
Group’s accreditations including BRC‑GS Global
Food Safety certification, the HACCP Food
Safety certification, the GMP certification, FDA
accreditation and ISO22000: 2018 – Food Safety
Management.
Comprehensive on‑boarding assessment for new
suppliers, which includes audit of our suppliers’
standards and supply chain.
The Group has an independent internal
Qualityand Technical team who report directly
tothe COO.
All materials go through food safety, chemical
and analytical testing to ensure they are of the
highest quality.
DAMAGE OR DISRUPTION TO MANUFACTURING FACILITIES
Risk description
All of the Group’s manufacturing
operations and the majority of
its warehousing are housed
over two buildings on a single
site. Extraordinary events such
as fire, structural collapse,
machinery or mechanical
failure, closures of primary
access routes, flooding or other
severe weather conditions could
adversely affect the Group.
Potential impact
Any major event could result in significant
manufacturing downtime or extensive damage to
manufacturing facilities. This in turn will affect the
Group’s ability to fulfil orders, adversely impacting
its financial situation.
Mitigation
The Group takes precautions against such issues
such as with fire detection systems, sprinklers,
security alarms and ensures these are tested
regularly.
The Group is insured against business
interruption.
The manufacture of certain product ranges are
outsourced to third parties.
In addition, as a short‑term measure, products
currently manufactured in‑house could be
outsourced to third‑party manufacturers to
ensure continuity of supply, recognising that this
would only partially protect profitability.
RISK MANAGEMENT
CONTINUED
Risk trend:
Increased risk No change Decreased risk Slight increase Slight decrease
44
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
LOSS OF KEY MEMBERS OF MANAGEMENT
Risk description
The Group’s performance
relies heavily on the efforts
and abilities of its Directors
and senior management team,
with whom a substantial
amount of business knowledge
is concentrated. Given the
Group’s LSE listing, this risk
is particularly relevant to
the retention of high-quality
personnel, with teams of
sufficient size, depth and
experience and an appropriate
level of functional expertise.
Potential impact
If any of the key members leave, they will take
considerable knowledge with them, which will take
time to rebuild in new team members.
Mitigation
The packages of Directors and senior
management now have a level of independent
oversight via the RemunerationCommittee.
Post year end, the Group prepared draft
short‑term and long‑term succession plans for
the Executive Directors and senior management
and began exploring how best to develop the
talent pipeline. The Nomination Committee will
beoverseeing this process.
RELIANCE ON KEY CUSTOMER RELATIONSHIPS
Risk description
The Group’s main route to
market is through B2B sales to
distributors and retailers.
Potential impact
The loss of a significant customer relationship
could have an adverse effect on the Group’s
business and financial condition.
Mitigation
Each of the largest customers have appropriate
lines of communication to the business and are
known to the CEO personally. In addition, each
has a Sales Manager for day‑to‑day contact.
All other customers are dealt with based on size
(e.g. significant attention from salesteam).
In FY25, no single customer contributed greater
than 10% of the Group’s revenue.
The Group continues to develop relationships
with new customers on an ongoing basis as a key
part of its multi‑pillar growth strategy which will
further diversify the revenue base.
HEALTH AND SAFETY INCIDENTS
Risk description
The nature of the Group’s
operations across
manufacturing and warehousing
results in an elevated risk of
health and safety incidents.
Potential impact
Failure to implement, and adhere to, appropriate
health and safety policies and procedures could
result in accident, serious injury or loss of life.
Enforcement action by HSE (Health & Safety
Executive) following a major incident could result
in financial penalties and reputational damage.
Mitigation
Formal health and safety (H&S) policies and
procedures are in place and we have a full‑time
Health and Safety manager who reports directly
to the COO.
These are communicated to employees via
induction training, employee noticeboards and
ToolTalks led byour H&S manager.
Adherence to procedures is monitored via
external audits and a zero‑tolerance approach
toH&S breaches is well established.
A culture of safety is promoted through
encouragement of near‑miss reporting by all
employees (via QR codes located around the site).
Accidents, injuries and near‑misses are reported
at main Board level alongside current H&S
actions and proposed initiatives.
IMPLEMENTATION OF GROWTH STRATEGY
Risk description
There is a risk that factors
beyond the Group’s control will
limit the Group’s ability to enact
and deliver all elements of its
growth strategy to enter new
geographies and increase sales
to new and existing customers.
Potential impact
If unable to deliver on the growth strategy, the
results of the Group in the future may fall below
that expected by shareholders.
Mitigation
The Group has appropriate oversight via the
Board of Directors regarding the ongoing
progress made against strategy, which is
regularly reviewed and challenged.
45
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
CONTINUED
Principal risks and uncertainties continued
GLOBAL POLITICAL AND ECONOMIC UNCERTAINTY
Risk description
As a global business, the
Group is exposed to a range of
economic conditions in certain
markets, as well as broader
macroeconomic factors and
potential instability in the
geopolitical environment.
Potential impact
Macroeconomic or political factors which result
in a reduction in disposable incomes and overall
downturn in economic spending could negatively
impact the Group’s sales, meaning the Group
fails to grow sales in line with forecast and
underperforming against market expectations.
Mitigation
The Group has employees in only two
jurisdictions (the UK and US), legal entities in
only three jurisdictions (UK, US and Colombia
– with Colombia being a dormant entity), and
the Group does not currently hold material cash
balances outside of the UK.
The Group has a high level of brand and product
loyalty which provides some protection against
an economic downturn, with products seen as
‘essential’ rather than ‘luxury’ items.
The Group’s products cover a range of price
points from elite and premium offerings through
to a dedicated discount line.
The Group performs regular reforecasting and
monitors the orderbook frequently, and the
market for its products is growing.
The Group has a sale in a significant number of
countries, and while it has high exposure to some
countries (such as the UK), more geographically
local political and economic issues are less likely
to have a more material impact on the Group.
NON-COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS, REGULATIONS AND BEST PRACTICES INCLUDING CORPORATE
SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY AND ETHICAL SOURCING
Risk description
Following its Main Market LSE
listing, the Group is subject
to increased compliance
from a legal andregulatory
perspective. A Main Market
listing has also exposed the
Group to a new level of scrutiny
from the public, shareholders
andregulators.
Furthermore, the Group’s
growth strategy includes
expansion into new markets and
territories which will expose
it to regulatory and legislative
requirements beyond its current
experience and knowledge
base. For example, US tax laws
are complex, with differing
requirements from a state and
federal perspective.
The Group’s products are
subject to a range of regulations
in the UK, Europe and other
territories concerning product
liability/safety and, in certain
markets, the Group places
reliance on the market expertise
and local knowledge of the
relevant customer in that
territory.
Potential impact
As the Group grows in size there will be increasing
requirements across many areas such as gender
pay reporting, Senior Accounting Officer, SECR
etc. This creates a risk of non‑compliance, with
the ongoing challenge of keeping existing and
new employees appraised and compliant with new
legislation. Any failure, or perceived failure, by
the Group to comply with any regulations could
result in potential litigation, damage to the Group’s
reputation and a loss of revenue.
Growth into new territories with different
regulations and legislations creates an elevated
risk of non‑compliance, with associated fines/
penalties or loss of reputation.
Failure to meet the Group’s ethical sourcing
standards may adversely affect its brand
reputation and customer demand for its products.
There is increased risk in this respect arising out of
the Group’s use of suppliers in other jurisdictions,
including EastAsia.
Mitigation
The Board has undertaken training regarding
responsibilities and obligations oflisted company
directors. Additionally, theBoard has four
Non‑Executive Directors who have significant
experience in executive and non‑executive roles
in listed businesses.
The Group makes increasing use of external
advisers where appropriate, in particular in
relation to overseas regulation, and listed
company requirements.
The Finance function is led by a CFO, supported
by a Group Financial Controller (GFC), both of
whom are qualified Accountants and therefore
obliged to remain up to date with all aspects of
financial reporting and regulation.
Customers in high‑risk markets are required to
pay at least part or all of their order in advance,
before goods will ship.
The Company generally does not take
responsibility for importation of products outside
the UK and EU, this is the responsibility of
overseas distributors. All overseas distributors
are vetted to ensure management believe they
understand their local regulatory framework,
and will represent the Applied Nutrition brand
appropriately.
While the reliance on partners presents a risk to
the Group, although the Directors consider the
risk of a partner or customer bringing a lawsuit
to the UK to be low. Where the Directors believe
it is prudent to do so, or there is an elevated risk
of legal action, the Group consults local experts
such as lawyers and accountants.
46
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
RELIANCE ON IT SYSTEMS AND RISK OF CYBER BREACH
Risk description
The Group’s operational and
financial management are
dependent on third-party and
‘cloud-based’ IT systems. Any
significant disruption in service,
whether malicious or otherwise,
could have a considerable
impact on thebusiness.
Potential impact
Significant IT downtime or breach of systems
through inappropriate cyber security could result
in significant financial loss, severe business
interruption from an operational perspective
andthe threat of reputational damage.
Mitigation
The Group does not maintain any ‘on‑premise’
IT systems and all key systems are cloud‑based.
The Group’s software vendors selection process
requires only using providers with reliable
systems and documented backup policies.
IT support is fully outsourced to a reputable third
party covered by an SLA.
CREDIT RISK
Risk description
The Group offers credit terms
to some customers which might
not be repaid.
Potential impact
The Group maintains a significant trade debtor
value on the balance sheet, creating a risk of
default and financial losses.
Credit risk increases as the volume of trade,
with a related risk of default, increases.
Mitigation
The Group has a comprehensive credit check
process taking into account numerous factors
such as trading history, reputation and credit
checks.
Major accounts are managed by a team of
Account Managers, with Finance completing a
weekly review of overdue debt and working with
the relevant sales lead to chase the debt.
All customers have a credit limit which can only
be exceeded with approval from the CFO or CEO.
Customers in high‑risk markets are required to
pay at least part or all of their order in advance,
before goods will ship.
NEW PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT
Risk description
Product innovation/NPD and
speed to market underpin the
Group’s success and represents
a key differentiator versus our
competitors. This reflects our
ability to anticipate, gauge and
react in a timely and cost-
effective manner to changes
in consumer preferences and
trends. If consumer sentiment or
preferences change materially
in a way which is adverse to
Applied Nutrition, it could impact
the Group’s performance.
Potential impact
Achieving growth through new products is a
key part of the Group’s strategic pillars and
therefore failure to capitalise on trends/consumer
preferences could result in the Group not achieving
its revenue targets and lead to a decrease in
profitability.
Mitigation
Members of the sales team and management
have regular conversations with customers and
other people in the industry to ensure latest
trends are being taken into account.
The Company has several members of staff who
have all or most of their time dedicated to NPD.
Analytics reports (e.g. from Amazon, Google data)
are regularly reviewed to ensure the results are
being taken into account.
Risk trend:
Increased risk No change Decreased risk Slight increase Slight decrease
47
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
CONTINUED
Going concern
The Directors have considered the
business activities as described in
the Strategic Report on pages 1 to 49,
including the organisation’s principal
risks and uncertainties disclosed on
pages 42 to 48. With due consideration
and review, the Directors have a
reasonable expectation that the Group
has adequate resources to operate over
the assessment period, being the twelve
months from the date of these financial
statements.
In addition, the Directors are not aware
of any material uncertainties that may
cast significant doubt upon the Company
or Group to continue as a going concern.
Consequently, the financial statements
have been prepared on a going concern
basis for the Group and the Company.
The Directors have assessed the
ability of the Company and the Group
to continue as a going concern using
three‑year cash flow forecasts prepared
from 31 July 2025 to 31 July 2028.
This is the timeframe of the Group’s
most recently approved strategic plan,
as approved by the Board and in addition
exceeds the period over which the Group
can reasonably plan capital investment
with certainty given the rapid growth of
the Group and change in investment that
may be required to meet such growth.
The Directors have considered forecast
expectations of performance, based
on historic data, along with available
funding options in case of unexpected,
contingent requirements.
GOING CONCERN AND VIABILITY STATEMENT
Pages 1 to 49 form part of the Strategic Report, which has been reviewed and approved by the Board.
Joe Pollard
Chief Financial Officer
7 November 2025
RAW MATERIAL PRICING AND AVAILABILITY
Risk description
External factors may result in
the Group being vulnerable to
fluctuations in the pricing and
availability of raw materials.
Such factors include natural
disasters, global conflicts,
political instability, inflation
and changes in the supply and
demand of commodities, fuel
prices and freight costs.
Potential impact
Major fluctuations in pricing could result in
increasing input costs, which negatively impact
product margin and result in the Group not
achieving its financial targets. Any changes to raw
material availability could have an adverse impact
on production schedules and the continued supply
of products to customers.
Mitigation
Key commodities have been identified and are
regularly monitored in terms of availability and
pricing. In some cases, future supply contracts
have been put in place for up to twelve months’
cover. Generally, the only commodity that sees
significant fluctuation is whey protein and
therefore this is closely monitored.
Purchase orders are monitored and pricing of key
commodities is reported monthly to the Board,
including the impact of new purchase orders on
current average costs of key raw materials.
Where price increases are anticipated, on site
warehouse space is maximised to build a greater
stock of raw material and future order prices
areagreed.
Where price decreases are anticipated, raw
materials stockholdings are reduced and a
movement towards spot purchasing is prioritised.
Regular sales meetings with suppliers are held
to discuss future movements in availability
andprice.
Regular reforecasting exercises are undertaken.
Principal risks and uncertainties continued
48
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
The market in which the organisation
operates is forecast to grow annually
inthe region of 8% or better.
The forecasts included several scenarios
including a base case and downside
case. The base case assumed revenue
growth during the next twelve months
on a customer‑by‑customer base for
the top ten customers, and then applied
a standard rate of growth in line with
market dynamics for the remainder of
the customer base and new potential
customers. Profitability and cash flow
assumptions were in line with recent
experience.
In the event of no further growth in the
business, it would remain profitable
and cash generative in the view of
management and therefore while
downside scenarios with no further
growth were considered, they did not
alter the view of management in terms
ofgoing concern. Nor did scenarios
where the working capital requirement
ofthe business increased.
When conducting this assessment, the
Directors also considered the principal
risks and uncertainties that the Group’s
risk management process had identified.
This risk management process and an
assessment of the principal risks and
uncertainties are detailed in the risk
management report. This assessment
considered the risks themselves in
addition to mitigating actions. Of the
principal risks and uncertainties, the
effect of a product safety event or
significant damage/disruption to the
Group’s manufacturing facilities were
considered in detail. These are the
key risks that are believed to present
a risk to the going concern view of
management.
The successful initial public offering
(IPO) of the organisation on the London
Stock Exchange in late 2024 has provided
access to potential additional funding
streams and acts as a catalyst for further
controlled enhancement of the product
range with expansion across multiple
geographic locations. On14October
2024, the Company entered into a
sterling revolving credit facility (RCF)
agreement with The Royal Bank
ofScotland plc.
The purpose of the RCF is for general
corporate and working capital purposes
of the Group as well as to finance
permitted acquisitions and capital
expenditure of the Group. The quantum
of the RCF is £10,000,000 with an
uncommitted accordion option for up
to £10,000,000. The terms of the RCF
include: (i) the Company as initial
borrower; (ii) a term of 36 months;
(iii)the margin being 1.7% above SONIA;
(iv) the provision of quarterly financial
information and an annual budget;
(v)anet leverage covenant set at 2:1
(total debt to adjusted EBITDA) and
interest cover (EBITDA to net finance
charges) set at 3:1; (vi) the provision of
guarantees by certain Group companies
that become material from time to time
in respect of the obligations under
the RCF; and (vii) secured by all asset
security granted by the Company and
certain other material Group companies.
The Company can terminate the RCF; at
any time without penalty and therefore,
if other forms of debt finance are more
commercially beneficial, the Company
can do so and utilise those other forms
without charge.
Based on the assessment performed,
and with no additional knowledge of
any material uncertainty that may affect
this assessment, the Directors believe
it is appropriate to prepare the financial
statements of the Group on a going
concern basis.
Viability statement
The Directors have adopted the UK
Corporate Governance Code, in which
the Directors are required to issue a
Viability Statement declaring whether
they believe the Group is able to continue
to operate and meet its liabilities for
the period to 31 July 2028 taking into
account its current position and principal
risks. This timeframe aligns with its most
recently Board‑approved forecast period
and strategic plan. The Directors have
assessed the prospects of the Group
by reference to the current financial
position, recent and historic financial
performance, the three‑year forecast,
its business model on pages 14 and
15, strategy on pages 16 and 17 and its
principal risks and mitigating factors on
pages 44 to 48.
Viability assessment period
The Directors considered an appropriate
viability assessment period to be the
three‑year period from 31 July 2025
to 31 July 2028. This is the timeframe
of the Group’s most recently approved
strategic plan, as approved by the
Board. The Group has applied extensive
financial modelling in arriving at the
assessment of going concern and
viability. Due consideration is given to
both micro and macro factors; covering
matters including health and safety, staff
management, quality raw materials and
supplier relations, through to geopolitical
and geoeconomic events. Such matters
are further considered with regard to
the material judgements and estimates
made in the preparation of the financial
statements and application of accounting
policies.
Assessment of viability
The Directors’ assessment of the Group’s
viability took into consideration the
current financial year’s performance,
forecast performance per the three‑year
plan to 2028, and the principal risks
and uncertainties of the Group. The
latter were considered with regard to
the Board’s risk appetite as detailed on
pages 42 to 48.
The Board reviewed the viability
assessment, which covered:
the planning process: strategic plan,
three‑year forecast;
annual strategy review;
review of assumptions; and
review of principal risks and
uncertainties, detailed on pages 42 to
48, and their potential impact on the
Group’s performance.
Conclusion
Based upon the viability assessment
performed, as noted above, the
Board assessed the prospects and
viability of the Group in accordance
with the UK Corporate Governance
Code requirements. The Board has a
reasonable expectation that the Group
will be able to continue in operation and
meet its liabilities as they fall due over
the period of the assessment.
49
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
Dear shareholder
I am pleased to present our first annual
statement on the corporate governance
of Applied Nutrition plc. As a Board, we
recognise that effective governance is
vital for maintaining trust in our ability to
deliver long‑term value for shareholders,
and during the time since IPO we have
established and embedded a sound
governance framework that facilitates
and supports the delivery of the
Company’s growth ambitions within an
environment of robust risk management
and independent oversight. The following
pages describe how this has been
achieved.
In preparation for our admission to
the Main Market of the London Stock
Exchange in October 2024, we assembled
a team of expert Board members, the
collective strength of which meant we
were able to add value from day one.
During this crucial time post IPO, the
Board has remained keenly focused on
monitoring performance against our
agreed objectives while also challenging
and refining our longer‑term strategy.
Concurrently, we have further developed
our risk management framework and our
internal controls monitoring policies and
procedures, including the establishment
of an internal audit function.
In the interests of continual
improvement, we conducted a Board
performance review in April 2025,
which confirmed that the Board was
operating effectively and constructively,
whilst also identifying opportunities for
improvement. Members of the Board
were asked to consider effectiveness
against the guidance of best practice
to ensure that there were no material
weaknesses and identify these areas for
potential improvement. The chair of each
Committee was responsible for reviewing
the effectiveness of that Committee
and I took overall responsibility for the
Board as a whole. We also reviewed
our compliance with the UK Corporate
Governance Code and agreed actions
to achieve compliance with certain
provisions where needed.
A key area of focus in this regard was
Board composition. As set out in the IPO
prospectus, it was our intention from the
outset to achieve compliance with the
Code’s provisions in this regard – plus, it
is my firm belief that Board performance
is dependent on having an optimal mix of
skills, experience and diversity of thought
to support effective decision‑making,
especially given the increasing
complexity of the global macroeconomic
environment within which the Company
operates.
With this in mind, we embarked on a
thorough and methodical search for
additional independent Non‑Executive
Directors to further strengthen the
team, and were delighted to welcome
Deepti Velury Bakhshi and Peter Cowgill
to the Board on 2 June 2025. Deepti
was also appointed as the designated
Non‑Executive Director for workforce
engagement, which brings us a step
closer to full alignment with the Code,
and I look forward to reporting to
shareholders next year on the insights
and impacts resulting from this initiative.
CHAIR’S GOVERNANCE OVERVIEW
ROBUST CORPORATE
GOVERNANCE
WE RECOGNISE
THAT EFFECTIVE
GOVERNANCE IS VITAL
FOR MAINTAINING
TRUST IN THE BOARD’S
ABILITY TO DELIVER
LONG-TERM VALUE TO
OUR SHAREHOLDERS.
Andy Bell
Independent Non‑Executive Chair
GOVERNANCE
AT A GLANCE
50
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
I would like to thank my fellow Board
members for their commitment and
diligence over the past year. Their
independent judgement and diversity of
approach are central to the resilience of
our governance framework. I also thank
our shareholders for their continued
engagement and support.
The Board is committed to driving and
safeguarding the long‑term sustainable
success of the Company and value
generation for its members through
robust corporate governance. The
report that follows describes our work
in pursuit of this aim and demonstrates
ouraccountability to you.
Andy Bell
Independent Non‑Executive Chair
7 November 2025
SKILLS, EXPERIENCE AND KNOWLEDGE OF OUR BOARD
Summary of the skills and experience held by our Directors
BOARD AND COMMITTEE MEETING ATTENDANCE
BOARD COMPOSITION
As at 31 July 2025
Meetings attended
Meetings eligible to attend
Independent 57%
Non‑independent 43%
Male 75%
Female 25%
White 87.5%
Minority ethnic 12.5%
Independence (excluding the Chair)
Gender
Ethnicity
5+ years 1
4‑5 years 2
2‑3 years 0
1‑2 years 3
Less than 1 year 2
Tenure
Director Board Nomination Audit and Risk Remuneration
Andy Bell
Tony Buffin
Peter Cowgill
Steven Granite
1
Marnie Millard
2
Joe Pollard
Thomas Ryder
Deepti Velury Bakhshi
Notes
1. Steven Granite was unable to attend the Board meetings on 22 November 2024 and 27 March 2025 due to other
commitments to the Company.
2. Marnie Millard was unable to attend the Board meeting on 23 January 2025 due to an existing commitment.
3. This table does not include former directors Alun Peacock or Dominic Platt, both of whom attended and were
eligible to attend one Board meeting in FY25.
4. In addition to the above ‘full’ Board meetings, there were six Board meetings called at short notice to approve
transactional matters relating to the IPO. These were attended by all Directors with the exception of one absence
each from Thomas Ryder, Tony Buffin and Marnie Millard due to existing commitments.
Core industry
M&A, Capital Markets
Risk
Corporate governance
Logistics
Remuneration
Strategy
Legal and compliance
Marketing
Financial
IT
People
Key
Subject matter expert
Significant experience
Good working knowledge
6 5
3
3
2
3
3
1
1
1
12
3
4
3
63
5
4
2
2 1
2
2
8
4
3
4
13
1
4
51
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
Appointed: 20 February 2024
Skills, experience and
contribution to strategy
Andy was appointed Non‑Executive
Chair of Applied Nutrition in February
2024. After several years in the financial
services sector, Andy co‑founded AJ
Bell in 1995. Having graduated from
Nottingham University in 1987 with a
first‑class degree in Mathematics, he
qualified as a Fellow of the Institute of
Actuaries in 1993 and built AJ Bell into
one of the UK’s largest online investment
platforms. Andy stepped down as Chief
Executive Officer of AJ Bell PLC in 2022
and has continued as a consultant. A
defining feature of Andy’s tenure as
Chief Executive Officer was a focus on
ensuring that AJ Bell’s primary purpose,
vision and culture were engrained in the
business. Andy believes that a strong
and effective governance framework is
one of the most important foundations on
which to successfully grow a business.
This approach to governance has stood
the test of time as AJ Bell has grown
from being a small enterprise to a FTSE
250 listed company. This invaluable
experience and deep commitment to
purpose‑led leadership and robust
governance makes Andy a highly
effective Chair and a strategic asset
tothe Applied Nutrition Board.
Previous roles
Chief Executive Officer of AJ Bell PLC
Other appointments: Andy has no
significant external appointments.
Appointed: 15 July 2014
Skills, experience and
contribution to strategy
Thomas is the Founder and Chief
Executive Officer of Applied Nutrition.
Thomas has been involved in the sports
nutrition, health and wellness market
since his early twenties, as a keen
gym‑goer with a passion for nutrition and
supplements. He started his professional
career in sports nutrition, health and
wellness with a supplements retail
store in Liverpool, which led him into
the wholesaling market and ultimately
to acquiring the Applied Nutrition brand.
Thomas started to manufacture his own
products for Applied Nutrition in 2016,
providing him with valuable experience
across retailing, wholesaling and
manufacturing, as well as managing his
own brand. This vertical experience has
helped Thomas build Applied Nutrition
into one of the fastest‑growing sports
nutrition, health and wellness brands in
the UK and Europe. Thomas’ hands‑on
experience across the entire value chain,
coupled with his entrepreneurial drive
and visionary leadership skills, make him
exceptionally well equipped to continue
to drive the Company forward in its
growth journey.
Other appointments: Thomas has no
significant external appointments.
Appointed: 6 April 2021
Skills, experience and
contribution to strategy
Steven is the Chief Operating Officer
(COO) of Applied Nutrition and was
appointed in April 2021. He is a qualified
Chartered Management Accountant and
a fellow of the Chartered Institute of
Logistics & Transport. Steven previously
led a private equity‑backed food logistics
company, Abbey Logistics Group Limited,
in roles as Finance Director, Managing
Director, Chief Executive Officer and
Executive Chairman, until October 2023,
when he led the sale of the business
to a European competitor (Sitra NV).
From 2012 to 2023, Steven founded
and chaired a multi‑award‑winning
not‑for‑profit initiative, Think Logistics,
which seeks to help young people
from disadvantaged backgrounds gain
opportunities within the logistics sector.
He was also previously a director of
Logistics UK, the UK’s largest logistics
trade body association, from 2019 to
2022. Steven’s strong combination of
financial, operational and leadership
expertise, with particular depth in
logistics and supply chain strategy, is
key to driving Applied Nutrition’s global
growth plans at pace.
Previous roles
Multiple roles at Abbey Logistics Group
Chair of Think Logistics
Director of Logistics UK
Other appointments: Steven has no
significant external appointments.
BOARD OF
DIRECTORS
OUR EXPERIENCED TEAM
ANDY BELL
INDEPENDENT
NON-EXECUTIVE CHAIR
N
R
THOMAS RYDER
FOUNDER AND
CHIEF EXECUTIVE OFFICER
D
STEVEN GRANITE
CHIEF OPERATING OFFICER
52
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
Appointed: 4 May 2021
Skills, experience and
contribution to strategy
Joe joined the Group as CFO in May
2021 and was appointed to the Board
of Directors at the same time. He
is a Chartered Accountant, having
qualified while working for Deloitte. He
previously worked at Grant Thornton in
its Corporate Finance practice advising
on M&A activity for entrepreneurs,
corporate entities and private equity
investors. He has extensive experience
leading complex transactions in multiple
jurisdictions. In 2021, Joe led the team
that advised on JD Sports taking a 32%
ownership interest in the Group. Prior
to joining Grant Thornton, Joe worked
at Deloitte where he spent time in both
the Audit and Equity Capital Markets
advisory teams. Joe also holds a
first‑class honours degree in Artificial
Intelligence from the University of
Liverpool. Joe brings a strong blend
of financial, transactional and strategic
expertise to the Board and his proven
ability to lead complex, cross‑border
transactions makes him a valuable
contributor to shaping the Company’s
growth strategy.
Previous roles
Director, Corporate Finance at
GrantThornton
Manager, Equity Capital Markets
atDeloitte
Other appointments: Joe has no
significant external appointments.
Appointed: 22 May 2024
Skills, experience and
contribution to strategy
Marnie was previously Group Chief
Executive for Nichols plc, the home of
Vimto. She now chairs the boards of
UA92, Kitwave Group PLC and Marks
Electrical PLC. Previously, she was chair
of Kidly Ltd and Mypura. com Group
Limited, and a Non‑Executive Director of
Finsbury Food Group PLC. Marnie held
the chair for the CBI in the North West
ofEngland for three years and was an
adviser to the Board of International
Trade. She was awarded an OBE in 2018
for her contributions to international
trade business in the North West of
England. Marnie brings critical insight
into brand building and international
growth, drawing on her extensive
experience in fast‑growing consumer
businesses to support Applied Nutrition’s
strategic ambitions.
Previous roles
Group Chief Executive of Nichols plc
Chair of Mypura.com Group Limited
Chair of Kidly Ltd
Non‑Executive Director of Finsbury
Food Group PLC
Non‑Executive Director of Belvoir
FruitFarms
Chair of the CBI, North West
Advisor to the Board of International Trade
Other appointments
1
:
Chair of Marks Electrical PLC
Chair of Kitwave Group PLC
Chair of UA92
JOE POLLARD
CHIEF FINANCIAL OFFICER
D
MARNIE MILLARD
SENIOR
INDEPENDENT DIRECTOR
N
R
Committee key:
N
Nomination Committee
A
Audit and Risk Committee
R
Remuneration Committee
D
Disclosure Committee
Committee chair
Appointed: 20 February 2024
Skills, experience and
contribution to strategy
Tony is the Executive Chair of Tecsa,
a software and consumer analytics
provider, which he founded in 2019.
Prior to founding Tecsa, Tony was CEO
of Holland & Barrett, the UK’s leading
alternative health and beauty retailer, the
former Chief Operating Officer and CFO of
Travis Perkins PLC, and prior to that was
CFO of Coles Group, a top 25 ASX listed
retailer. Tony spent his earlier career at
Boots and Loyalty Management Group
where he led the successful sale of the
business to Canadian‑listed Aimia Inc. He
is a fellow of the ICAEW and graduated
from Cambridge University with a first
class degree in Geography. He is chair
of Highbourne Group and Nobia AB.
Tony’s background in driving business
transformation and applying data‑led
consumer insights enables him to play a
key role in shaping the Board’s strategic
priorities and market positioning.
Previous roles
Chief Executive Officer of Holland
&Barrett
Chief Operating Officer and Chief
Financial Officer of Travis Perkins PLC
Chief Financial Officer of Coles Group
Other appointments
1
:
Chair of Highbourne Group
Chair of Nobia AB
Non‑Executive Director of DFS
Furniture plc
TONY BUFFIN
INDEPENDENT
NON-EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR
A
N
D
53
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
BOARD OF DIRECTORS
CONTINUED
Appointed: 2 June 2025
Skills, experience and
contribution to strategy
Peter is a distinguished business
leader with a proven track record in
the retail and consumer sectors. He
is best known for his 18‑year tenure
as Executive Chairman of JD Sports
Fashion plc, during which he oversaw
the significant growth and international
expansion of the business, transforming
it from a small UK retailer to a member
of the FTSE 100 with more than 3,400
stores across 27 territories worldwide
and revenues of over £10 billion. In
2021, Peter led JD Sports Fashion
plc’s acquisition of a minority holding
in Applied Nutrition and subsequently
became a personal investor in the Group
ahead of its IPO. Peter currently serves
as Non‑Executive Chair of The Fragrance
Shop and is a Fellow Chartered
Accountant. His proven ability to scale
operations globally, execute high‑value
acquisitions and drive outstanding
shareholder value make him well placed
to help shape the Company’s strategy.
Previous roles
Executive Chairman of JD Sports
Fashion plc
Other appointments
1
:
Chair of The Fragrance Shop
Appointed: 2 June 2025
Skills, experience and
contribution to strategy
Deepti is currently the CEO of Publicis
Production. Prior to this, she was
Chief Technology and Transformation
Officer at Epsilon, Publicis where she
led transformation initiatives focused
on data, AI and scalable marketing
technology. Before joining Epsilon,
Deepti served as Chair of Tag Worldwide,
following her tenure as Global Chief
Operating Officer where she led the
company’s transformation agenda –
modernising operations, technology
and workforce strategy. Earlier in her
career, she led global transformation
at Cushman & Wakefield and began
her career in consulting at Accenture.
Deepti’s extensive leadership background
in global operations, marketing and
driving transformational change
positions her as a key contributor
tostrategic planning.
Previous roles
Chief Technology and Transformation
Officer at Epsilon, Publicis
Global Chief Operating Officer and later
Chair of Tag Worldwide
Head of EMEA Business Transformation
and Change at Cushman & Wakefield
Senior Manager at Accenture
Other appointments
1
:
CEO of Publicis Production
PETER COWGILL
INDEPENDENT
NON-EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR
N
A
DEEPTI VELURY BAKHSHI
INDEPENDENT
NON-EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR
N
R
Committee key:
N
Nomination Committee
A
Audit and Risk Committee
R
Remuneration Committee
D
Disclosure Committee
Committee chair
1. The Board approved significant external
appointments and confirmed it believed that suitable
time was available for the Director to discharge their
duties for Applied Nutrition.
54
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
CORPORATE
GOVERNANCE
REPORT
Purpose
The Board is collectively responsible for
the leadership, oversight and control of
the Company’s business. Fundamental
to this is defining and establishing the
Company’s purpose and ensuring that
strategy is aligned with it – and that
both are underpinned by the values and
culture required for them to succeed.
The Board has agreed the Company’s
purpose: We Fuel Your Moment™.
We have also agreed the Company’s
strategic growth pillars, which are
discussed in detail in the Strategic
Report on pages 16 and 17. Purpose,
vision and values were explored in depth
at the Board’s inaugural Strategy Day
in May 2025 and agreed collectively by
theBoard.
Culture
The Board sets the Company’s culture
primarily by setting the organisation’s
key policies, such as the Whistleblowing
Policy, Ethical Trading and Modern
Slavery Policy, Health and Safety Policy,
and Charitable and Political Donations
Policy. The Board is also responsible
for assessing and monitoring culture
and ensuring that any misalignment is
addressed. During our first year post
IPO, we explored how this might most
effectively be achieved and landed on a
Culture Dashboard, which is currently
being progressed.
Should a member of staff feel the need
to raise concerns in confidence, the
Group’s Whistleblowing Policy provides
direct contact details of the CEO and
CFO in addition to an independent
whistleblowing charity.
Should an issue be raised, it will be
investigated and dealt with by the
Company’s whistleblowing office (the
CFO). In the event the concern is raised
about the CFO, it would be investigated
by another member of the Board.
Workforce engagement
In accordance with the UK Corporate
Governance Code, Deepti Velury Bakhshi
was appointed as the designated
Non‑Executive Director for workforce
engagement upon joining the Board on
2June 2025. The Board is developing
formal terms of reference for the role
during FY26.
MORE ABOUT ENGAGEMENT WITH EMPLOYEES
ANDOTHER STAKEHOLDERS CAN BE FOUND
IN THE S172 STATEMENT IN THE STRATEGIC
REPORT – PAGES 32 TO 37
OUR PURPOSE
OUR VALUES
OUR VISION
The Board has agreed the Company’s
purpose, vision and values as follows:
We Fuel Your Moment™
Whether that’s to
Fuel your healthier lifestyle,
Fuel your workout or
Fuel your elite performance,
We’re here to Fuel Your
Moment.
To become the world’s
most trusted and innovative
sports nutrition, health and
wellness brand.
• Family
• Agility
• Customer first
• Trust
• Originality
• Respect
55
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT
CONTINUED
BOARD LEADERSHIP
AND COMPANY PURPOSE
UK CORPORATE GOVERNANCE
CODE 2024 STATEMENT OF
COMPLIANCE
In accordance with the UK Listing
Rules, the Company is subject to the
UK Corporate Governance Code (the
“Code”) which is available on the
FinancialReporting Council website at
www.frc.org.uk. The Board has chosen
to early adopt the 2024 version of the
Code and we are proud of the fact that
we have achieved compliance with all
but two of the provisions in the short
time since becoming a listed company.
How we comply with the Code is set
out on the pages referenced below.
Where we are not yet compliant, or did
not comply during any part of the year,
anexplanation is provided.
How we comply with the Code
1. BOARD LEADERSHIP
AND COMPANY PURPOSE
Our Board of Directors Pages 52 to 54
Board activities during FY25 Page 57
Business model and strategy Pages 14 and 15
2. DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITIES
Division of responsibilities Page 58
3. COMPOSITION, SUCCESSION
AND EVALUATION
Board performance review
and effectiveness Page 62
Nomination Committee report Pages 60 to 62
4. AUDIT, RISK AND INTERNAL CONTROL
Audit and Risk
Committee report Pages 63 to 65
5. REMUNERATION
Remuneration
Committee report Pages 66 to 81
Exceptions to compliance
PROVISION 2
The Board should assess and monitor
culture and how the desired culture
hasbeen embedded.
This was a key agenda item at the
Board’s Strategy Day in May 2025
and the Board has now agreed how
best to develop its culture monitoring
capabilities. This will include analysis
of available data sets with a view to the
creation of a Culture Dashboard. We look
forward to updating shareholders on
progress next year.
PROVISION 11
At least half the Board, excluding
the Chair, should be Non‑Executive
Directors whom the Board considers
tobe independent.
For the period from IPO to 1 June 2025,
there were three Executive Directors
and two independent Non‑Executive
Directors (excluding the Chair) on the
Board, meaning that fewer than half
the Directors (excluding the Chair)
were independent. As stated in the IPO
prospectus, whilst not in full alignment
with the Code’s recommendations, the
Directors agreed that this composition
represented an appropriate mix of skills,
experience and knowledge to take the
business forward at that stage and that
the overall balance was such that no
one individual or group of individuals
were able to dominate decision‑making.
During the year, the Directors resolved
to further strengthen the collective
expertise of the Board, resulting in
the appointment of two independent
Non‑Executive Directors on 2 June
2025, thereby bringing the Company
into compliance with Provision 11 of
the Code for the last two months of the
year. Please refer to the Nomination
Committee report on pages 60 to 62 for
more details.
How the Board discharges
itsresponsibilities
The Board of Directors is responsible for
the long‑term success of the Company
and is committed to upholding high
standards of corporate governance in
line with the principles and provisions
of the Code. During the period since
IPO, we have focused on laying strong
foundations to support the Company’s
growth plans and embed responsible
leadership.
The Board provides effective leadership
within a robust framework of oversight
and control. It sets the Company’s
strategic aims and ensures that the
necessary financial, operational and
human resources are in place to
deliver on those aims. While day‑to‑day
management is delegated to the
executive leadership team, the Board
retains responsibility for significant
matters and decisions, guided by a
formal schedule of matters reserved
forits consideration.
Our Board is composed of individuals
with abroad range of experience, skills
and perspectives, including a majority
of independent Non‑Executive Directors.
This balance supports constructive
challenge, accountability and strategic
oversight. The roles of Chair and Chief
Executive Officer are clearly defined and
separated to ensure effective governance
and independent leadership. These roles
are discussed further on page 58.
BOARD PERFORMANCE IS
DEPENDENT ON HAVING
AN OPTIMAL MIX OF
SKILLS, EXPERIENCE AND
DIVERSITY OF THOUGHT
TO SUPPORT EFFECTIVE
DECISION-MAKING.”
Andy Bell
Independent Non‑Executive Chair
56
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
BOARD ACTIVITIES
Below is a summary of the Board’s key activities undertaken during the period from IPO to 31 July 2025.
PERFORMANCE MONITORING FINANCIALS AND AUDIT GOVERNANCE STAKEHOLDER ENGAGEMENT
Received and discussed
regular Business Reviews
from management covering
strategy, financials, legal
matters, performance
against market
expectations, new product
development, people, and
health and safety.
Received reports from the
Committee chairs at each
Board meeting.
Approved the FY25
unaudited interim accounts.
Approved the auditors’
engagement letter.
Approved the FY26 budget.
Approved periodic trading
updates to the market.
Appointed an external firm
of Internal Auditors and
agreed an Internal Audit
Charter and agreed a plan
of activities to be performed
in FY25 and FY26.
Reviewed regular reports
from the Company
Secretary on the Company’s
application of the principles
and provisions of the UK
Corporate Governance Code
and conducted an in‑depth
review at the Strategy Day.
Approved the appointments
of Deepti Velury Bakhshi
and Peter Cowgill.
Received corporate
governance and compliance
updates from the Company
Secretary at each meeting.
Approved the FY26 agenda
cycle and deep dive
schedule.
Agreed the structure,
content and frequency of
management reports to the
Board.
Discussed the results of
the Board performance
review and agreed
requiredactions.
Received bi‑monthly
presentations from our
corporate brokers on
share price performance
and investor feedback and
sentiment.
Agreed on the method of
the Board’s engagement
with the workforce and
appointed Deepti Velury
Bakhshi as the designated
Non‑Executive Director for
workforce engagement.
STRATEGY
Approved the
Company’s FY26
strategy, including
M&A and capital
allocation
strategy
Approved the
Company’s
purpose, vision
and values
Approved Key
Performance
Indicators
57
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT
CONTINUED
DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITIES
The Board is comprised of the independent Non‑Executive Chair, four independent Non‑Executive Directors and three Executive
Directors. Each cohort has a particular role to play and it is vital that there is a clear division of responsibilities between the Chair
and CEO in particular. These are summarisedbelow.
CHAIR
CHIEF EXECUTIVE
OFFICER (CEO)
INDEPENDENT
NON-EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS
SENIOR INDEPENDENT
DIRECTOR (SID)
The Chair’s principal
responsibility is the
effective running of the
Board.
The Chair is responsible
for ensuring that the
Board: (i) as a whole, plays
a full and constructive
part in the development
and determination of
the Company’s strategy
and overall commercial
objectives; and (ii)
determines the nature, and
extent, of the significant
risks the Company is
willing to embrace in the
implementation of its
strategy.
The Chair is the guardian of
the Board’s decision‑making
processes.
The Chair is also
responsible for engagement
with shareholders to
understand their views
on governance and
performance against
strategy and ensure that
the Board as a whole has a
clear understanding of the
views of shareholders.
The CEO’s principal
responsibility is running the
Company’s business.
The CEO is responsible for
proposing and developing
strategy and overall
commercial objectives,
to be done in close
consultation with the Chair
and the Board.
The CEO is responsible,
with the executive team,
for implementing the
decisions of the Board and
its Committees.
The primary role of the
independent Non‑Executive
Directors is to assess,
challenge and monitor
the Executive Directors’
delivery of strategy within
the risk and governance
structure agreed by the
Board.
Non‑Executive Directors
bring a collective wealth
of experience to Board
discussions, ensuring
that decisions are taken
in view of a wide range of
perspectives.
The Board’s primary
Committees are composed
of a majority of (or
entirely of) independent
Non‑Executive Directors,
which is key to ensuring
independent oversight.
In accordance with the
provisions of the UK
Corporate Governance
Code, the Board has elected
one of its non‑executives,
Marnie Millard, as the Senior
Independent Director, the
role of which is as follows:
The SID’s principal
responsibility is acting as
a sounding board for the
Chair and serving as an
intermediary for the other
Directors and shareholders.
The SID assists in the
maintenance of the stability
of the Board and Company,
particularly during periods
of stress. This will involve
working with the Chair,
Directors and shareholders
to resolve significant or
sensitive issues.
The SID takes responsibility
for an orderly succession
process for the Chair,
working closely with the
Nomination Committee.
58
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
THE BOARD
COMMITTEES
The role of the Board of Directors is to lead the Company, setting its purpose, values, strategy and culture. The Board is also
responsible for monitoring performance and ensuring the necessary resources are in place to achieve the Company’s objectives and
to achieve long‑term value for the benefit of shareholders and other stakeholders.
In accordance with the recommendations of the UK Corporate Governance Code and best practice, the Board delegates certain
activities to its Committees, the roles and responsibilities of which are set out in formal terms of reference agreed by the Board.
Please see the Committees’ terms of reference on the website: https://www.appliednutritionplc.com/governance/
EXECUTIVE TEAM
Thomas Ryder,
CEO
Steven Granite,
COO
Joe Pollard,
CFO
SEE BIO PAGE 52 SEE BIO PAGE 52
SEE BIO PAGE 53
AUDIT AND RISK
COMMITTEE
Chair: Tony Buffin
Additional members:
Peter Cowgill
The Audit and Risk
Committee is comprised
entirely of independent
Non‑Executive Directors.
The role of the Audit and
Risk Committee is to assist
the Board in fulfilling its
oversight responsibilities by
reviewing and monitoring:
the integrity of the
Company’s financial and
narrative information
provided to shareholders;
the Company’s internal
controls and risk
management systems;
internal and external audit
process and auditors; and
the processes for
compliance with financial
laws, regulations and
ethical codes of practice.
NOMINATION
COMMITTEE
Chair: Andy Bell
Additional members:
Tony Buffin, Peter Cowgill,
Marnie Millard, Deepti
Velury Bakhshi
The Nomination Committee
is comprised of a majority of
independent Non‑Executive
Directors.
The role of the Nomination
Committee is to:
ensure there is a formal,
rigorous and transparent
procedure for the
appointment of new
Directors to the Board
and senior management
(being the first layer of
management below Board
level);
lead the process for Board
and senior management
appointments and to make
its recommendations to
the Board;
oversee the development
of a diverse pipeline for
succession; and
assist the Board in
ensuring its composition
is regularly reviewed and
refreshed.
REMUNERATION
COMMITTEE
Chair: Marnie Millard
Additional members:
Andy Bell, Deepti Velury
Bakhshi
The Remuneration
Committee is comprised of
a majority of independent
Non‑Executive Directors.
The role of the
Remuneration Committee
is to assist the Board in
fulfilling its responsibility to
shareholders to ensure that:
remuneration policy and
practices of the Company
are designed to support
strategy and promote
long‑term sustainable
success, reward fairly
and responsibly, with a
clear link to corporate and
individual performance,
having regard to
statutory and regulatory
requirements; and
remuneration of the Chair
of the Board, Executive
Directors and senior
management is aligned
with the Company’s
purpose and values and
linked to the delivery of
the Company’s long‑term
strategy.
DISCLOSURE
COMMITTEE
Chair: Tony Buffin
Additional members:
Joe Pollard, Thomas Ryder
The role of the Disclosure
Committee is to assist
the Board in maintaining
compliance with its
obligations around the
identification, management,
control and disclosure of
inside information. This
includes:
determining whether
information meets the
definition of ‘inside
information’ as defined
in the UK Market Abuse
Regulation (MAR) and the
Disclosure Guidance and
Transparency Rules (DTR);
ensuring that access
to inside information is
strictly controlled and
insider lists maintained in
accordance with MAR; and
determining whether
inside information must
be announced without
delay or whether there
are grounds for delaying
disclosure to protect the
Company’s legitimate
interests.
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE
REPORT PAGES 66 TO 81
NOMINATION COMMITTEE
REPORT PAGES 60 TO 62
AUDIT AND RISK COMMITTEE
REPORT PAGES 63 TO 65
59
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
NOMINATION
COMMITTEE REPORT
Introduction
As chair of the Nomination Committee,
Ipresent the Committee’s report on
our activities during the year and the
progress made towards achieving our
objectives. The role of the Committee is
summarised on page 59 and I describe
below our key activities and areas of
focus during the year.
Composition
The Committee has met the composition
requirements of the UK Corporate
Governance Code throughout the
year, being comprised of a majority of
independent Non‑Executive Directors.
There are no Executive Directors on the
Committee.
Board appointments
Appointment of Deepti Velury Bakhshi
As set out in the IPO prospectus, the
Company listed with a strong Board in
October 2024. However, we recognised
that it would be beneficial to broaden
the range of skills, experience and
backgrounds around the table; plus,
it was always our intention to meet
the UK Corporate Governance Code’s
expectation that the Board be comprised
of a majority of independent Directors
excluding the Chair. We also are
committed to pursuing our gender and
ethnicity diversity targets as set out
in our Diversity Policy on page 61 and
were intent on diversifying not only the
professional skills and experience of the
Board but also its collective mix of social
backgrounds and lived experiences.
The Committee agreed in January
2025 to commence a search for
oneor more additional Directors.
We carefully considered our search
methodology, including whether it
met the UK Corporate Governance
Code’s requirement that appointments
be subject to a ‘formal, rigorous
and transparent procedure’, ‘based
on merit and objective criteria’, and
‘promote diversity, inclusion and equal
opportunity’, and concluded that tapping
into the Directors’ extensive professional
networks, as well as seeking assistance
from a number of well‑connected
professionals, was in alignment with
these aims. We also considered the
Code’s expectation that ‘open advertising
and/or an external search consultancy
should generally be used’ and concluded
that it would not be the best use of
shareholders’ funds to engage an
external search firm, particularly
given the strength of the Directors’
professional networks. However, in order
to cast the net as widely as possible, we
also conducted open advertising through
appropriate channels.
To help guide the search, and to support
the Committee’s role in monitoring the
composition of the Board generally, a
Board skills matrix was drawn up which
ranked each current Director against
twelve different skills areas using
a points system indicating whether
they had ‘good working knowledge’,
‘significant experience’, or were a ‘subject
matter expert’. All Directors fed into
the exercise and it proved effective,
highlighting the Board’s skills gaps. Most
notably, the Committee identified that the
Board would benefit from more ‘people
experience, i.e. in HR or workforce
engagement, and it was agreed that the
successful candidate would ideally be
appointed as the Board’s designated
Non‑Executive Director for workforce
engagement.
WE ARE PLEASED WITH THE RESULTS OF
OURCONCERTED EFFORTS TO FURTHER
STRENGTHEN AND DIVERSIFY THE BOARD.
Andy Bell
Chair of the Nomination Committee
PRIORITIES DURING THE YEAR
Leading the search for additional
independent Non‑Executive
Directors, resulting in the
appointments of Deepti Velury
Bakhshi and Peter Cowgill.
Positive progress towards
the Board’s agreed diversity
objectives.
Conducting our first Board and
Committee performance review.
MEMBERS AND ATTENDANCE
Committee member Position Attendance
Andy Bell Chair 3/3
Tony Buffin Member 3/3
Peter Cowgill
1
Member
Marnie Millard Member 3/3
Deepti Velury
Bakhshi
1
Member
Notes
1. Peter Cowgill and Deepti Velury Bakhshi
joined the Committee upon their appointment
to the Board on 2 June 2025.
60
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
The Committee approved a written
role brief setting out the qualifications
and experience sought. The brief also
confirmed that the selection process
would take into account wider elements
of diversity to ensure the composition
of the Board is appropriately balanced
to support the strategic direction of
the Company, and that applications
were invited from both experienced
Non‑Executive Directors as well as those
seeking their first non‑executive role.
The search resulted in the Committee
reviewing a shortlist of ten applicants.
Following a series of interviews by
Committee members and meetings
with the Executive Directors and key
stakeholders, the Committee agreed
unanimously that Deepti Velury
Bakhshi’s skills, experience and personal
characteristics made her ideally suited
to the needs of the Board and to the role
of designated Non‑Executive Director for
workforce engagement.
Appointment of Peter Cowgill
During the year, the Committee also led
the appointment of Peter Cowgill as an
additional independent Non‑Executive
Director. Peter was already known to
the Company and was identified as
a potentially valuable addition to the
Board on the basis of his formidable
experience in leading and executing
UKand international growth strategies,
both organically and through M&A,
aswell as his expertise in appealing
tohealth‑conscious consumers.
The Committee gave serious
consideration to Peter’s independence
given he had previously served as
Executive Chairman of JD Sports
Fashion plc, a major shareholder of
the Company, and had also served as
a Director of the Company for just over
a year. Both appointments had ceased
in June 2022. Following discussion,
and having taken external advice, the
Committee agreed that Peter should
be deemed as independent given
the time that had since passed. The
Committee also engaged with the
Company’s largest shareholders on the
matter (representing approximately
two‑thirds of its share capital), all of
whom expressed strong support for the
appointment.
Recommendations to the Board
As a result of the work outlined above,
the Committee resolved to recommend
to the Board that both Deepti Velury
Bakhshi and Peter Cowgill be appointed
as Non‑Executive Directors of the
Company and that both be deemed to be
independent. The Committee also agreed,
in discussion with the Board, that the
appointments provided an opportunity
to rationalise the membership of the
Board’s Committees. The Board accepted
the Committee’s recommendations and
appointed Deepti and Peter effective
2June 2025, at which point Deepti joined
the Remuneration Committee and Peter
joined the Audit and Risk Committee,
with Tony Buffin and Marnie Millard
stepping down from those committees,
respectively. Both new Directors were
also appointed to the Nomination
Committee.
Board diversity
The Board agreed its Board Diversity
Policy at IPO, including specific targets
that the Committee will report against
each year in the Annual Report.
Policy statement
The Board believes that diversity
is critical to providing the range of
perspectives, insights and challenge
needed to promote innovation and
support sound, well‑informed decision‑
making at Board level. Diversity in the
context of this policy includes, but is
not limited to, consideration of race
and ethnicity, age and generation,
gender and gender identity, sexual
orientation, religious and spiritual beliefs,
disability, and socioeconomic status and
background.
The Directors have a duty to promote
the long‑term sustainable success of
the Company and appointments to the
Board must therefore be made with
this objective in mind. To this end, the
Directors will select candidates on merit
and objective criteria and, in doing so,
will consider the diversity that each
individual will bring to the Board as
well as their specific skills, knowledge
and sector expertise as applicable to
the Company’s business and strategic
objectives.
Diversity principles
The Board, through the authority
delegated to the Nomination Committee,
will apply the following principles to
promote diversity at Board level:
Where appropriate, engage only
executive search firms who have signed
up to the voluntary Code of Conduct on
gender diversity and best practice.
Ensure potential Board candidates are
drawn from a broad and diverse range
of candidates including those who
may not have previous listed company
experience but who possess suitable
skills or qualities.
Specific diversity targets
The Directors are committed to
increasing Board diversity over a
sensible period of time and have agreed
a timeframe within which to achieve
the targets set out in UK Listing Rule
9.8.6R(9). These are set out below,
together with a report on progress.
Objective: At least 40% of Directors to be
women by 30 July 2027.
We started the year with one female
Director, equating to 17% of the Board.
We are pleased to have made progress
against this objective during the year
with the appointment of Deepti Velury
Bakhshi. Notwithstanding that Peter
Cowgill was also appointed, female
representation on the Board has
increased from 17% (one out of six) to
25% (two out of eight), which brings us
closer to our goal.
Objective: Continue to have at least one
of the position of Chair, CEO, Senior
Independent Director or CFO held by
awoman.
Marnie Millard was appointed as
Senior Independent Director at IPO and
continues to hold this position. This
objective has therefore been achieved
and maintained.
Objective: At least one Director to be
from a minority ethnic background by
30July2027.
This objective was achieved ahead of
target following the appointment of
Indian‑born Deepti Velury Bakhshi to
theBoard.
61
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
Succession planning
Given the Committee’s other priorities
during the Company’s first year
postIPO, succession planning was not
an immediate focus. We have, however,
begun laying the foundations. Post year
end, we reviewed draft short‑termand
long‑term succession plans for
the Executive Directors and senior
management and began exploring how
best to develop the talent pipeline. We
will report more on this next year.
Board performance review
The Board conducted its first
performance review in April 2025.
Although the Board was only six months
into the role postIPO, we felt it was
worthwhile reviewing performance
to date. The process kicked off with
a questionnaire prepared with input
from the Company Secretary, with a
mix of multiple choice and open‑ended
questions covering the performance of
the Board, its Committees and individual
Directors. I collected the data and
prepared a written report for discussion
at the Board’s Strategy Day in May,
followed by a final report which was
noted at the next Board meeting.
The findings were reassuringly
positive and we also identified certain
improvements and initiatives which
wereput into action immediately:
make certain enhancements to
management reports to the Board with
an increased focus on growth pillars;
arrange one Board meeting in London
each year, to include a store or
customer visit;
agree and schedule a programme of
deep dives at each Board meeting with
presentations from senior colleagues;
and
establish formal terms of reference for
the designated Director for workforce
engagement.
GENDER
Number of
Board members
Percentage of
the Board
Number of
senior positions
on the Board
(CEO, CFO,
SID and Chair)
Number in
executive
management
1
Percentage of
executive
management
Female 2 25% 1 4 31%
Male 6 75% 3 9 69%
Not specified/prefer not to say
ETHNIC BACKGROUND
Number of
Board members
Percentage of
the Board
Number of
senior positions
on the Board
(CEO, CFO,
SID and Chair)
Number in
executive
management
1
Percentage of
executive
management
White British or other White 7 87.5% 4 11 85%
Mixed/Multiple ethnic groups
Asian/Asian British 1 12.5%
Black/African/Caribbean /
Black British
Other ethnic group
(including Arab) 2 15%
Not specified/prefer not to say
NOMINATION COMMITTEE REPORT
CONTINUED
1. Executive management is defined above using the prescribed definition in the Listing Rules. This is defined as the most senior executive or managerial body below the Board,
including the Company Secretary. At Applied Nutrition, this is the senior leadership team, which has day‑to‑day responsibility for the operation of the business (including
Executive Directors), and the Company Secretary.
62
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
Committee overview
Introduction
As chair of the Audit and Risk Committee,
I am pleased to report to shareholders
on the work we’ve carried out during
the Company’s first financial period
postIPO. The role of the Committee is
summarisedon page 59 and I describe
below our key activities and areas of
focus during the year.
Composition and attendance
At IPO the Committee comprised
TonyBuffin (chair) and Marnie
Millard. On 2June 2025, Peter
Cowgill was appointed as a member
of the Committeeand Marnie Millard
stepped down. All three individuals are
independent Non‑Executive Directors
and the Committee has therefore met
the composition requirements of the UK
Corporate Governance Code throughout
the year. Committee meetings are
routinely attended by the Chief Financial
Officer and the external auditor, and
all Directors have an open invitation
to attend Committee meetings should
theywish.
How the Committee discharges its
responsibilities
The Committee has unrestricted access
to documents and information as well
as to employees of the Group, the
external auditor and the internal auditor.
TheCommittee chair meets regularly
with the Chief Financial Officer. Members
of the Committee may, in pursuit of
their duties, take independent financial
advice on any matter, at the Group’s
expense. The Committee chair reports
the outcome of Audit and Risk Committee
meetings to the Board. The Committee
meets at least three times a year and
has an agenda linked to the events in the
Group’s financial calendar.
Financial reporting oversight
Review of interim and annual accounts
In March 2025, the Committee reviewed
the Company’s draft interim results
for the six months to 31 January
2025. In October 2025, the Committee
reviewed the Company’s draft Annual
Report and Accounts for the year
ended 31July2025. In particular,
the Committee reviewed disclosures
regarding risk and internal controls.
The Committee also concluded that
the Annual Report and Accounts, taken
as a whole, were fair, balanced and
understandable, and reported this
assessment to the Board.
Significant issues
In reviewing the accounts – and at its
meetings throughout the year – the
Committee assessed whether suitable
accounting policies had been adopted
and whether management had made
appropriate judgements and estimates.
The following significant issues were
addressed by the Committee in relation
to the Company’s FY25 interim and
annual accounts.
Share-based payments
The Committee considered the
accounting treatment of share awards
granted to the US CEO. On the advice of
the Company’s accounting advisers, it
was concluded that the valuation showed
a resulting impact that was immaterial
and there was no proposal to change any
accounting policies.
THE COMMITTEE PROVIDES INDEPENDENT,
RIGOROUS OVERSIGHT TO SAFEGUARD THE
INTEGRITY OF THE COMPANY’S FINANCIAL
REPORTING AND RISK MANAGEMENT.
Tony Buffin
Chair of the Audit and Risk Committee
MEMBERS AND ATTENDANCE
Committee member Position Attendance
Tony Buffin Chair 2/2
Peter Cowgill Member
1
1/1
Marnie Millard Member
2
1/1
Notes
1. Peter Cowgill joined the Committee upon his
appointment to the Board on 2 June 2025.
2. Marnie Millard stepped down from the
Committee on 2 June 2025.
PRIORITIES DURING THE YEAR
Review and recommendation
ofthe FY25 interim accounts
tothe Board.
Review and recommendation
of the FY25 Annual Report and
Accounts to the Board (post
yearend).
Reviews of the Group risk
register and principal risks
anduncertainties.
Review and oversee the TCFD
implementation plan.
AUDIT AND RISK
COMMITTEE REPORT
63
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
AUDIT AND RISK
COMMITTEE REPORT
CONTINUED
Financial reporting oversight
continued
Significant issues continued
Impact of FX on intercompany loan
The Committee reviewed reports from
management analysing the impact
of foreign exchange fluctuations on
the accounting of the intercompany
loan between the Company and its US
subsidiary. In prior years these impacts
had been immaterial and recognised in
the income statement within overheads.
However, given the increased volatility
in exchange rates, management had
deemed it appropriate to review the
details of the relevant accounting
standard. Management’s review of the
appropriate IFRS standards resulted in
such gains/losses being recognised in
other comprehensive income instead.
It was agreed to seek external advice
on the matter and, following review of
the accounting advisers’ external report
validating management’s analysis, the
Committee agreed that management’s
treatment was appropriate.
Stock valuation
The auditors highlighted a risk around
provisioning for aged inventory, which
was considered heightened as a result
of its size and judgemental nature.
Asa result, management reviewed its
internal processes for reviewing aged
inventory and ensured that members
of staff independent to the finance team
(such as the buying and quality teams)
were involved with the internal work
and discussions with auditors. The audit
approach involved auditor checks on
use‑by dates, reviews of all unprovided
SKUs for potential obsolescence, and
analysis of sales data. Following review,
the Committee satisfied itself that the
risks around incorrect provisioning of
aged inventory were sufficient and it was
noted that the auditors had not proposed
any adjustments (factual or judgemental)
to the stock provision within the accounts.
Going concern
The Committee reviewed management’s
assessment of the Company’s ability to
continue as a going concern. This review
considered the Group’s current financial
position, its projected cash flows and
liquidity requirements, the availability
of committed financing facilities, and the
potential impact of macroeconomic and
operational risks.
The Group ended the financial year
with astrong balance sheet, positive
operating cash flow and sufficient
liquidity headroom. The Committee noted
that the Group has no debt and that
available cash resources and banking
facilities are expected to be more than
adequate to meet forecast requirements
for the period.
Based on these considerations, and
having made appropriate enquiries, the
Committee is satisfied that the going
concern basis of accounting remains
appropriate. The Board has accordingly
adopted the going concern basis in
preparing the financial statements.
Viability statement
In accordance with Provision 31
of the UK Corporate Governance
Code, the Committee reviewed the
Group’s longer‑term viability over a
period of three years, consistent with
management’s strategic planning
horizon. The assessment considered
the Group’s current financial position,
business model, and principal risks and
uncertainties, including potential effects
of adverse scenarios on liquidity and
solvency.
Stress testing and sensitivity analysis
were performed on key assumptions
relating to revenue, margins and capital
expenditure under a range of plausible
downside scenarios. The Committee
also reviewed the adequacy of available
financing facilities under these conditions
and management’s contingency planning
for mitigating adverse impacts.
Based on this assessment, the
Committee has a reasonable expectation
that the Group will be able to continue in
operation and meet its liabilities as they
fall due over the three‑year period of
assessment.
Risk and internal controls
Group risk reviews
The Committee reviews the Group risk
register as a standing item at each of
its meetings. Alongside the review of
the interim and annual accounts, the
Committee also reviewed the Company’s
principal risks and uncertainties,
supporting materials from management
and the auditors. The Committee worked
with management throughout the year
to hone the register and to ensure
that gross and net risks were clearly
delineated and the greatest net risks
were prioritised for review appropriately.
As part of its reviews, the Committee
monitored and challenged progress
against the risks and recommended
mitigating actions identified by the
Company’s lawyers at the time of IPO.
Inparticular, the Committee discussed
the Company’s risks around data
protection and internal controls and the
mitigating actions taken. The Committee
satisfied itself that both risks had been
sufficiently mitigated.
64
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
Internal controls and internal audit
function
During the year the Committee
agreed that the Company’s continued
growth and complexity warranted
consideration of an internal audit
function. Management were tasked with
researching potential external providers
and RSM was appointed to provide this
on an outsourced basis. Following this
appointment, the Committee approved
a programme of internal reviews
and satisfied itself that the plan was
appropriately aligned with the Company’s
immediate risks and its longer‑term
strategic and operational goals. It was
agreed to begin with a review of Cash
and Banking Management, which was
concluded during the year.
As the internal audit function was only
established mid‑year, the effectiveness
of the function was first assessed by the
Committee post year end at its October
2025 meeting. The Committee reviewed
the quality, clarity and usefulness of
the Cash and Banking Management
report and agreed that the internal audit
function was operating effectively.
In addition to the appointment of an
internal auditor, the Committee worked
with management to ensure that there
was a plan for constant monitoring and
improvement of the Company’s internal
controls focused on areas which were
considered to be higher risk.
Climate and governance
TCFD monitoring
The Committee is responsible
for overseeing the integrity and
effectiveness of the Company’s
climate‑related disclosures in line with
the recommendations of the Task Force
on Climate‑related Financial Disclosures
(TCFD) and the UK Listing Rules.
The Company’s TCFD monitoring plan
was established in advance of its IPO
to ensure that appropriate governance,
risk management and disclosure
processes were in place from the point
of listing. Throughout the year, the
Committee revisited this plan to assess
its continuing suitability in light of the
Group’s evolving business strategy. A full
review of the framework was undertaken
in October 2025.
Following its October 2025 review,
the Committee concluded that the
Company’s approach to TCFD monitoring
and disclosure remained robust and
proportionate, and that the disclosures
in the Annual Report were consistent
with the TCFD framework and the
requirements of the UK Listing Rules.
Corporate Governance Code compliance
At each of its meetings, the Committee
reviewed a status update on the
Company’s compliance with the
principles and provisions of the UK
Corporate Governance Code, prepared
by the Company Secretary. Areas
of potential non‑compliance were
addressed accordingly.
Policies and compliance
Whistleblowing
The Committee reviews any
whistleblowing reports received at each
meeting. To date, no such reports have
been received.
Policy reviews
During the year the Committee reviewed
all key Group policies with a risk or audit
element, including the Whistleblowing
Policy, Non‑Audit Services Policy
and Anti‑Money Laundering Policy.
At the Committee’s suggestion,
enhancements were introduced to the
Treasury Management Policy and Risk
Management Policy.
External audit
Audit team
The Company’s external auditor is BDO
LLP and the lead audit engagement
partner is Gareth Singleton. The firm was
formally appointed just prior to IPO in
September 2024 in respect of the FY24
audit. Gareth Singleton became lead
audit engagement partner in respect of
these FY25 reports and accounts. This
is therefore the Company’s second year
of audit by the firm and the first year of
audit by the lead audit partner.
Auditor independence
The Board has established a Non‑Audit
Services Policy to preserve the
independence and objectivity of the
external auditor by restricting its
involvement in the provision of non‑audit
services when a conflict of interest, real
or perceived, may exist. The Committee
reviews this policy annually. BDO LLP
does not have any connections with
any of the Committee’s members.
During the IPO of the Company, BDO
performed certain non‑audit services to
the Company acting as the ‘Reporting
Accountant’. Taking into account the
nature of these services, and mitigations
put in place by BDO at the time of the
services, the Committee is satisfied
that the requirements for auditor
independence are met. The auditor has
also formally confirmed its independence
to the Committee.
Audit effectiveness
The Committee reviewed the
effectiveness of the external audit
process through discussions with senior
management and key members of
the Finance team, without the auditor
present. The Committee concluded that
the audit process was effective.
Committee effectiveness
Performance evaluation
The Committee evaluated its
performance as part of the Board
performance review conducted in
April 2025 and discussed on page 50.
The Committee concluded that it was
operating effectively.
Tony Buffin
Chair of the Audit and Risk Committee
7 November 2025
65
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
REMUNERATION
COMMITTEE REPORT
THE COMMITTEE LOOKS FORWARD TO ENGAGING
WITH SHAREHOLDERS AND STAKEHOLDERS
ON AN ONGOING BASIS AND WELCOMES ANY
FEEDBACK OR COMMENTS ON THE DIRECTORS’
REMUNERATION REPORT. I LOOK FORWARD TO
SEEING SHAREHOLDERS AT THE UPCOMING AGM.
Marnie Millard
Chair of the Remuneration Committee
Introduction
Dear shareholder,
On behalf of the Remuneration
Committee (the “Committee”), I am
pleased to present Applied Nutrition’s
first Directors’ Remuneration Report
(the “Report”) as a listed company
for theperiod from Admission on
29October2024 until 31 July 2025.
The Report is in three sections:
SECTION PAGES
Chair’s letter to shareholders 66 and 67
Directors’ Remuneration Policy 68 to 76
Annual Report on Remuneration 77 to 81
Directors’ Remuneration Policy
On behalf of the Board, I am pleased
to present Applied Nutrition plc’s first
Directors’ Remuneration Report following
our admission to the London Stock
Exchange in October 2024.
Thisrepresents an important milestone
in the Company’s journey as a newly
listed business, and the Remuneration
Committee has been focused on
transitioning effectively into the listed
environment.
As a growth‑focused consumer
brand with a strong commitment to
performance and innovation, it is vital
that our remuneration arrangements
enable us to attract, motivate and
retain the right leadership team.
TheCommittee has therefore developed
a policy that is aligned with UK corporate
governance expectations, while also
reflecting the founder‑led nature of
Applied Nutrition.
As such, we have designed the
Remuneration Policy having regard
to the substantial shareholdings of
the existing Executive Directors, but
also with a view to designing a flexible
policy which, in the future, enables the
Company to attract new executives with
a competitive package.
We recognise that remuneration
will continue to be an area of focus
for investors and stakeholders.
TheCommittee is committed to ongoing
engagement, ensuring that our policy
remains fair, competitive and responsive
as the Company evolves. I look forward
to updating you in future years on how
our remuneration framework continues
to support the execution of our growth
strategy and the creation of long‑term
value for all stakeholders.
Performance in 2025
The business performed strongly
throughout FY25, driven by strong
second‑half trading performance, with
Group revenue being ahead of market
expectations at £107.1 million (FY24:
£86.2 million), and adjusted EBITDA up
approximately 18.7% year‑on‑year at
£30.9 million. These outcomes reflect
the successful delivery of the Group’s
multi‑pillar, global growth strategy
and mark a strong first year as a listed
company, with performance exceeding
the guidance provided at IPO.
PRIORITIES DURING THE YEAR
During the year, the Committee’s
key activities included:
Approval of annual bonus
targetsand payouts for FY25.
Finalisation of the Directors’
Remuneration Policy ahead of
the first shareholder vote at the
2026AGM.
Review of annual bonus
metricsfor FY26.
MEMBERS AND ATTENDANCE
Committee member Position Attendance
Marnie Millard Chair 2/2
Andy Bell Member 2/2
Tony Buffin
1
Member 1/1
Deepti Velury
Bakhshi
2
Member 1/1
Notes
1. Stepped down from the Committee on
2June2025.
2. Joined the Committee on 2 June 2025.
66
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
Remuneration Committee
principalresponsibilities
The Committee’s principal
responsibilities are to recommend
the Group’s policy on executive
remuneration, determine the levels of
remuneration for Executive Directors and
the Chair of the Board and prepare an
annual remuneration report for approval
by the shareholders at the AGM.
The Chair, and the Executive Directors
asnecessary, are invited to attend
meetings of the Committee, except
when their own remuneration is being
directly discussed. The Committee met
twice during the year and the table on
page66details attendance of members
at these meetings.
FY25 remuneration
Prior to Admission, the Remuneration
Committee undertook a market review
of salaries in UK‑listed businesses
of equivalent size and complexity to
Applied Nutrition. As set out in the
Prospectus, the base salary with effect
from Admission for Thomas Ryder was
£350,000, and for Joe Pollard and Steven
Granite this was £250,000. Despite
their pre‑IPO salary levels being below
typical pay levels for equivalently sized
listed companies, both Thomas and
Steven waived their right to this base
salary increase on Admission, with the
base salary changes for both being
effective for the next financial year
(starting1August2025).
For FY25 the Company operated an
annual bonus scheme. Both Thomas
Ryder and Steven Granite also waived
their right to participate in the bonus
for FY25, recognising their substantial
shareholdings and existing strong
alignment with shareholders.
The maximum opportunity for Joe
Pollard under the bonus scheme was
200% of salary. The annual bonus for
Executive Directors was based solely
on adjusted EBITDA performance. The
Company delivered an adjusted EBITDA
(before executive bonus) of £31.0 million,
which corresponded to an outcome
equivalent to 21.7% of the annual bonus.
The Committee carefully considered the
performance outcomes under variable
pay schemes for FY25. TheCommittee
strongly believes that the incentive
outcome appropriately reflectsthe
performance of the business. Overall,
theCommittee concluded that the
outcomes were appropriate and did
not apply discretion to adjust the
remuneration outcomes.
Implementation of our
Remuneration Policy in FY26
Base salary
The CEO’s and COO’s salaries that were
agreed on IPO, being £350,000 and
£250,000 respectively, are effective from
1 August 2025. The CFO’s salary has not
been increased and remains at £250,000.
Applied Nutrition Incentive Plan
The maximum opportunity for Executive
Directors will be 100% of salary (below
the 200% of salary maximum under
the proposed Directors’ Remuneration
Policy), with one‑third of awards
delivered in cash and the remaining
two‑thirds delivered in shares, vesting in
equal annual tranches over the two‑year
period following grant.
The performance measures and
weightings for FY26 will remain
measured solely on financial
performance of the Group during the
financial year and will be weighted:
70% adjusted EBITDA; and
30% revenue.
Closing remarks
The Committee looks forward to
engaging with shareholders and
stakeholders on an ongoing basis and
welcomes any feedback or comments
on the Directors’ Remuneration Report.
I look forward to seeing shareholders at
the upcoming AGM.
Marnie Millard
Chair of the Remuneration Committee
7 November 2025
67
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT
CONTINUED
DIRECTORS’
REMUNERATION POLICY
This Directors’ Remuneration Policy
(the “Remuneration Policy”) will govern
Applied Nutrition’s future remuneration
for Executive and Non‑Executive
Directors, and is intended to apply for
up to three years from the date of the
2026 Annual General Meeting, subject to
approval by shareholders.
Committee process to determine
Remuneration Policy
The Committee designed the
Remuneration Policy around the
following key considerations:
forward‑looking remuneration
arrangements should be simple,
facilitating greater transparency and
alignment with shareholders’ interests
over the longer term;
alignment with standard market
practice and compliance with the UK
Corporate Governance Code;
the ability to attract, retain and
motivate Executive Directors of the
right calibre to ensure the continued
success of the business, in what is a
highly competitive environment, whilst
ensuring that the level and form of
remuneration is appropriate; and
remuneration should be aligned with
the key corporate metrics that drive
growth and increased shareholder
value with significant emphasis on
variable pay.
The role of the Committee and the
formulation of the Remuneration Policy
is undertaken in a way that ensures
remuneration decisions are undertaken
in a manner that prevents and manages
any potential conflicts of interest.
Should any conflicts arise, these will
be alerted to the Committee who will
determine appropriate decisions in the
best interests of Applied Nutrition’s
stakeholders.
In addition, the Committee has ensured
that the Directors’ Remuneration Policy
and practices are consistent with the
six factors set out in Provision 40 of the
Corporate Governance Code:
Clarity – Our Directors’ Remuneration
Policy is well understood by our senior
executive team and has been clearly
articulated to our shareholders and
representative bodies (both on an
ongoing basis and during consultation
when changes are being made).
Simplicity – The Committee is mindful
of the need to avoid overly complex
remuneration structures which can be
misunderstood and deliver unintended
outcomes. Therefore, a key objective
of the Committee is to ensure that
our Directors’ Remuneration Policy
and practices are straightforward to
communicate and operate.
Risk – Our Directors’ Remuneration
Policy has been designed to ensure that
inappropriate risk‑taking is discouraged
and will not be rewarded, via: (i) the
balanced use of performance measures
in the Applied Nutrition Incentive Plan
which employs an adjusted EBITDA
weighting; (ii) the significant role
played by shares in our incentive
plans (together with shareholding
requirements during, and after,
employment); and (iii) malus/clawback
provisions within all our incentive plans.
Predictability – Our Incentive Plan is
subject to individual caps, with our
share plans also subject to market
standard dilution limits. At the time of
approving the Remuneration Policy, full
information on the potential values of
the annual Applied Nutrition Incentive
Plan are provided, with strict maximum
opportunities and minimum, target and
maximum performance scenarios.
Proportionality – There is a clear link
between individual awards, delivery of
strategy and our long‑term performance.
In addition, the significant role played
by incentive/‘at‑risk’ pay, together with
the structure of the Executive Directors’
service contracts, ensures that poor
performance is not rewarded.
Alignment to culture – Our executive
pay policies are fully aligned to Applied
Nutrition’s culture through the use of
metrics in the Applied Nutrition Incentive
Plan that measures how we perform
against key aspects of our strategy,
which has the objective of delivering
sustainable growth. The Committee
oversees consistent workforce reward
principles and is satisfied that these
policies drive the right behaviours and
reinforce the Group’s values, which in
turn promote an appropriate culture.
The use of deferral in shares under
the Applied Nutrition Incentive Plan,
holding periods and our shareholding
requirements strengthen the focus on
our strategic aims and ensure alignment
with the interests and experiences of
shareholders, both during and after
employment.
68
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
ELEMENT, PURPOSE AND
LINK TO STRATEGY OPERATION
MAXIMUM
OPPORTUNITY
PERFORMANCE CONDITIONS
AND ASSESSMENT
Base salary
This is the core element
of pay and reflects the
individual’s role and
position within the Group
with some adjustment
to reflect their capability
and contribution.
Base salary is paid in twelve equal monthly
instalments during the year.
Base salaries are reviewed annually with any
changes normally effective from 1 August each
year, and also (where relevant) to reflect changes
in the responsibilities of each individual.
The base salary levels set on IPO for Thomas
Ryder and Steven Granite were below typical
salary levels for listed businesses of equivalent
size and complexity as a result of their substantial
shareholdings. As such, the Committee reserves
the right to review the appropriateness of these
throughout the life of the Remuneration Policy.
Whilst there is not a set
maximum, increases will
normally be in line with the
range of increases awarded
to other employees.
Salary increases above this
level may be awarded in
appropriate circumstances,
including, but not limited to,
the following:
to reflect any change in
the level of responsibility
of the individual (whether
through a change in role
or an increase in the
scale and/or scope of the
activities carried out by
the Company); and
an increase in experience
and knowledge of the
Company and its markets.
n/a
Benefits
To provide a
comprehensive and
competitive benefits
package which is valued
by recipients.
Executive Directors receive benefits set at
an appropriate level taking into account total
remuneration, market practice, the benefits
provided to other employees in the Group and
individual circumstances.
Executive Directors will be eligible for a range
of benefits, which may include, but is not limited
to, travel, car allowance, staff discount and
relocation expenses.
The Committee reserves the right to introduce
other benefits, for example in the case that this is
necessary to attract and/or retain key Executive
Directors.
Whilst the Committee
has not set an absolute
maximum on the level
of benefits Executive
Directors may receive,
the value of benefits is
set at a level which the
Committee considers to be
appropriately positioned
taking into account relevant
market levels based on
the nature and location
of the role, the level of
benefits provided for other
employees in the Group and
individual circumstances.
n/a
Pension
To provide a competitive
remuneration package
and to encourage
retirement planning
and retain flexibility for
individuals.
A defined contribution pension scheme is open to
all employees and Executive Directors.
In appropriate circumstances, such as where
contributions exceed the annual or lifetime
allowance, Executive Directors may take a taxable
cash supplement instead of contributions to a
pension plan.
The percentage level of
pension provision (or cash
allowance equivalent) for
Executive Directors will
not exceed the highest
percentage contribution
rate available to a majority
of employees.
The current pension
contribution is 3% of salary
between the lower and
upper earnings threshold.
n/a
Policy table
69
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT
CONTINUED
ELEMENT, PURPOSE AND
LINK TO STRATEGY OPERATION
MAXIMUM
OPPORTUNITY
PERFORMANCE CONDITIONS
AND ASSESSMENT
Applied Nutrition
Incentive Plan
To incentivise the
delivery of financial
and strategic priorities
and directly align the
Directors’ interests with
those of shareholders.
Awards under the Incentive Plan are dependent
on the achievement of performance measures.
Normally, up to one‑third of the award earned is
paid in cash following the end of the performance
period.
The balance is deferred in the form of a nil cost
option, conditional share award or restricted
share which vests in equal annual tranches
over the subsequent two years and is thereafter
subject to a further two‑year post‑vesting holding
period.
A discretionary underpin will apply over the
deferral period. The underpin may also apply over
the performance period.
Malus applies to cash awards prior to payment
and Deferred Share Awards prior to vesting.
Cash payments are subject to clawback
provisions for up to two years following payment.
Deferred Share Awards are subject to clawback
provisions in the two‑year period following
vesting.
Malus and clawback may apply in the following
circumstances:
a material misstatement of the Company’s
results, assessment of a performance target
or the number of deferred shares granted was
based on error, or inaccurate or misleading
information;
gross misconduct or fraud on the part of the
Participant;
reputational damage to the Company;
a material failure of risk management;
insolvency or corporate failure.
Up to 200% of base salary. Performance measures
may be based on financial
and non‑financial metrics
(including corporate,
divisional or individual
measures), but at least 50%
of awards will be based on
financial measures.
Where a sliding scale of
targets is used, attaining
the threshold level of
performance for any
measure will not typically
produce a payout of more
than 25% of the maximum
portion of overall annual
bonus attributable to that
measure, with a sliding scale
to full payout for maximum
performance.
In accordance with the
Code, the Remuneration
Committee will retain overall
discretion to adjust awards
if they are not believed to be
in line with overall Company
performance.
Policy table continued
70
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
ELEMENT, PURPOSE AND
LINK TO STRATEGY OPERATION
MAXIMUM
OPPORTUNITY
PERFORMANCE CONDITIONS
AND ASSESSMENT
Share ownership
guidelines
To further align the
interests of Executive
Directors with those of
shareholders.
Executive Directors are expected to build up a
prescribed level of shareholding equal to 150%
ofsalary.
To the extent that the prescribed level has
not been reached, Executive Directors will be
expected to retain a proportion of the shares
vesting under the Company’s share plans until
the guideline is met. For the purpose of assessing
the shareholder versus the prescribed level, any
vested awards subject to a holding period and
unvested awards not subject to performance
conditions will be included (discounted for
anticipated tax liabilities).
In addition to the shareholding guideline above,
Executive Directors will be expected to retain
the lower of actual shares held at cessation and
shares equal to 150% of salary for two years
postcessation. The Committee may disapply this
requirement and/or permit earlier sale of shares
in exceptional circumstances.
n/a n/a
Chair and Non‑Executive
Director remuneration
To enable the Company
to recruit and retain
Company Chairs and
Non‑Executive Directors
of the highest calibre, at
the appropriate cost.
The fees paid to the Chair of the Board and
Non‑Executive Directors are intended to be
competitive with other fully listed companies of
equivalent size and complexity. The fees for the
Chair of the Board and Non‑Executive Directors
may include a basic fee and additional fees
for further responsibilities (for example, when
chairing Board Committees or holding the office
of Senior Independent Director).
The fees payable to the Non‑Executive Directors
are determined by the Board. The fee for
the Chair of the Board is determined by the
Remuneration Committee.
Directors do not participate in decisions regarding
their own fees.
Reasonable expenses and other benefits may also
be provided (such as travel expenses and office
support).
Non‑Executive Directors’
remuneration will not be set
outside the parameters of
prevailing market rates for
similarly sized companies of
comparable complexity.
n/a
71
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
Assumptions used in the scenario chart
REMUNERATION ELEMENT POLICY AND OPERATION
Fixed pay
The base salary levels reflect those effective from 1 August 2025.
Fixed elements comprise of base salary, pension and other benefits.
Pension is 3% of salary between the lower and upper earnings threshold.
Benefit levels are assumed to be the same level as in FY25.
On‑target
The on‑target performance scenario assumes an Incentive Plan payout of 50% of maximum
(i.e. 50% of base salary).
Maximum
The maximum performance scenario assumes an Incentive Plan payout of 100% of maximum
(i.e. 100% of base salary).
Maximum + 50% share price
growth
This scenario illustrates the impact of 50% share price appreciation which applies to the share
element of the Incentive Plan award.
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT
CONTINUED
Illustrations of the application of the Remuneration Policy
CEO
Fixed (£357,321)
(%) 100
On‑target (£532,321)
(%) 67 11 22
Maximum (£707,321)
(%) 51 16 33
Maximum +50% SP appreciation
(£823,988)
(%) 44 14 28 14
C0O
Fixed (£257,321)
(%) 100
On‑target (£382,321)
(%) 67 11 22
Maximum (£507,321)
(%) 51 16 33
Maximum +50% SP appreciation
(£590,654)
(%) 44 14 28 14
CFO
Fixed (£257,321)
(%) 100
On‑target (£382,321)
(%) 67 11 22
Maximum (£507,321)
(%) 51 16 33
Maximum +50% SP appreciation
(£590,654)
(%) 44 14 28 14
Fixed pay
Incentive Plan (cash)
Incentive Plan (shares)
Incentive Plan with 50% share appreciation
72
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
Recruitment policy
In the event that a new Executive Director (whether this is an external recruit or internal promotion) or Non‑Executive Director
was to be appointed, remuneration would be determined consistent with the Policy table, paying no more than necessary.
Thetable below sets out the additional elements of remuneration that would be considered for the appointment of a new
Executive Director.
REMUNERATION ELEMENT POLICY AND OPERATION
Buy‑out awards
If it were necessary to attract the right candidate, due consideration would be given to
makingawards necessary to compensate for forfeited awards in a previous employment.
In making any such award, the Committee will take into account any performance conditions
attached to the forfeited awards, the form in which they were granted and the timeframe
ofthe forfeited awards.
The value of any such award will be capped to be no higher on recruitment than the
forfeitedawards and will not be pensionable nor count for the purposes of calculating
Incentive Plan awards.
Any such award would be in addition to the normal Incentive Plan awards set out in the
Policytable.
One‑off recruitment award
In exceptional recruitment circumstances, the Remuneration Committee retains the ability
togrant a one‑off award of up to 200% of salary in addition to any normal incentive award.
The proportion that is split between cash and shares would be determined by the
Remuneration Committee at the time; however, it is anticipated that the significant majority
would be settled in shares.
In respect of an internal promotion to the Board, any commitments made before the promotion will continue to be honoured, even
if they would otherwise be inconsistent with the Remuneration Policy prevailing when the commitment is fulfilled.
73
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
Service contracts
The Executive Directors are each engaged under a rolling contract of service requiring twelve months’ notice of termination
on either side for Thomas Ryder, and six months for Joe Pollard and Steven Granite respectively. The dates of the Executive
Directors’ service agreements are as follows:
Date of service agreement
Thomas Ryder 15 October 2024
Joe Pollard 15 October 2024
Steven Granite 15 October 2024
All Non‑Executive Directors are subject to re‑election at each AGM. The appointment of the Non‑Executive Directors may be
terminated on either side on one month’s notice. The dates of each Non‑Executive Director’s appointment are as follows:
Date of service agreement Expiry of current term
Andy Bell 15 October 2024 3 years following appointment
Tony Buffin 15 October 2024 3 years following appointment
Peter Cowgill 2 June 2025 3 years following appointment
Marnie Millard 15 October 2024 3 years following appointment
Deepti Velury Bakhshi 2 June 2025 3 years following appointment
Copies of the service contracts and letters of appointment are held at the Company’s registered office and will be available for
inspection within normal business hours/at the Annual General Meeting.
Malus and clawback
The following table illustrates the time periods during which malus and clawback provisions may apply for each element of
remuneration:
REMUNERATION ELEMENT MALUS
CLAWBACK
Incentive Plan (cash element) Up to the date of the cash payment. Up to two years post the date of any cash payment.
Incentive Plan (deferred
shares)
To the end of the two‑year vesting period. Up to two years post vesting.
Conditions under which malus and clawback may apply include:
the discovery of a material misstatement resulting in an adjustment in the audited consolidated accounts of Applied Nutrition plc
or the audited accounts of a Group company;
the assessment of any performance target in respect of an Incentive Award was based on error, or inaccurate or misleading
information;
the discovery that any information used to determine the number of shares subject to a Deferred Share Award was based on
error, or inaccurate or misleading information;
action or conduct of a Participant which, in the reasonable opinion of the Board, amounts to fraud or gross misconduct;
events or behaviour of a Participant have led to the censure of a Group company by a regulatory authority or have had a
significant detrimental impact on the reputation of any Group company provided that the Board is satisfied that the relevant
Participant was responsible for the censure or reputational damage and that the censure or reputational damage is attributable
to them;
a serious failure of risk management of Applied Nutrition plc, a Group company or a business unit of the Group; and/or
Applied Nutrition plc or any Group company or business of the Group becomes insolvent or otherwise suffers a corporate
failure so that the value of shares is materially reduced, provided that the Board determines following an appropriate review
ofaccountability that the Participant should be held responsible (in whole or in part) for that insolvency or corporate failure.
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT
CONTINUED
74
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
Payments for loss of office
When assessing whether payments will be made in respect of loss of office, the Committee will take into account individual
circumstances including the reason for the loss of office, Applied Nutrition and individual performance up to the loss of office and
any contractual obligations of both parties.
Contractual payments
In the event of early termination, the Company may make a payment in lieu of notice up to a maximum of twelve months’ salary
for Thomas Ryder and six months’ salary for Joe Pollard and Steven Granite. Any payment is subject to phasing and mitigation
requirements.
In the event of gross misconduct, the Company may terminate the service contract of an Executive Director immediately and with
no liability to make further payments other than in respect of amounts accrued at the date of termination.
The current Executive Director service contracts permit the Company to put an Executive Director on garden leave for some or all
of the duration of the notice period.
Incentive Plan
The treatment of awards under the Incentive Plan for leavers will depend on whether or not they are classified as a Good Leaver.
A Good Leaver is defined as a Director leaving due to the following reasons:
death;
ill‑health, injury or disability;
transfer of a Participant’s relevant employment outside of the Group; or
in any other circumstances at the Remuneration Committee’s discretion (except for gross misconduct).
For other leavers, the Committee will take into account individual circumstances, contractual terms, circumstances of the
termination and the commercial interests of the Group to determine whether or not to treat a leaver as a Good Leaver.
The table below sets out the leaver treatment for awards under the Incentive Plan.
REMUNERATION
ELEMENT
TREATMENT FOR
GOOD LEAVER
TREATMENT FOR
OTHER LEAVER
REMUNERATION
COMMITTEE DISCRETION
Incentive Plan
Eligible for an Incentive
Plan award, taking into
account performance
conditions and/or
underpins.
Normally, any cash value
which becomes payable
under the Incentive Plan or
shares which vest under
the Deferred Share Award
will be time pro‑rated to
reflect the number of whole
months from the beginning
of the performance period
or deferral period until the
date of leaving employment
as a proportion of the
relevant performance
period or deferral period as
relevant.
A Deferred Share Award
will ordinarily lapse if it
has not been exercised
within six months of
cessation of employment
or, if later, when it becomes
exercisable.
If a Participant ceases to
be employed within the
Group for any reason before
an Incentive Plan award
is determined, or during
the deferral period of a
Deferred Share Award, then
such award will normally
lapse.
It is at the discretion of the
Committee as to whether
departing Directors would
be entitled to the Incentive
Plan award. In exercising its
discretion on determining
the amount payable and
the timing of payment to
an Executive Director on
termination of employment,
the Committee would
consider each instance
on an individual basis,
taking account of factors
such as performance
and circumstances of
thetermination.
When determining whether
any value becomes payable
to a departing Director, the
Committee will ensure that
no ‘reward for failure’ is
made.
75
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
Payments in the event of a change of control
The treatment of each element of remuneration under a change of control is set out in the table below.
REMUNERATION ELEMENT REMUNERATION POLICY AND OPERATION
Incentive Plan
An Incentive Award or a Deferred Share Award will vest immediately in such proportion as
is determined by the Committee in its absolute discretion taking into account any factors it
considers relevant, including, but not limited to, the assessment of any performance targets
applying to the Incentive Award or any performance underpins or other conditions applying
tothe Deferred Share Award as at the date of the change of control.
Unless the Committee agrees to exchange outstanding Deferred Share Awards into awards in
the acquiring company, any outstanding deferred shares will ordinarily vest in full at the date
of change of control (other than in respect of an internal reorganisation).
Consideration of employee conditions elsewhere in the Group
The Committee considers pay levels across the organisation when setting remuneration for all Directors (both Executive and
Non‑Executive). However, this review is undertaken against a background of ensuring that the prevailing market rates for all
levels of employee in the organisation are taken into account in order to attract, retain and motivate the best employees at each
level. In relation to Directors, specific account is taken of any change in the level of responsibility of the Director (whether through
a change in role or the increased size of the Company) or an increase in experience and knowledge of the Company and its
markets which may not be relevant to roles elsewhere in the Company.
The Company does not deem it appropriate to formally consult with employees regarding the determination of the Directors’
Remuneration Policy. However, employees have the opportunity to make comments on any aspect of the Company’s activities
through an employee survey and any comments made which are relevant to Directors’ remuneration would be considered by
theCommittee.
Consideration of shareholder views
Prior to Admission, the views of the major shareholders were considered when determining the Policy. If the Committee was to
consider changes to the Policy, it would be subject to prior consultation with major shareholders as appropriate.
The Committee takes the views of the shareholders seriously and these views will be taken into account in shaping remuneration
policy and practice. Shareholder views will be considered when evaluating and setting remuneration strategy and the Committee
welcomes an open dialogue with its shareholders on all aspects of remuneration.
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT
CONTINUED
76
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
ANNUAL REPORT ON REMUNERATION
Introduction
This section of the report sets out how Applied Nutrition has implemented its proposed Policy and legacy arrangements for
Executive Directors since Admission in October 2024. This is in accordance with the requirements of the Large and Medium‑sized
Companies and Groups (Accounts and Reports) Regulations 2008 (as amended).
Single total figures of remuneration (audited)
(£) Salary/fees
Taxable
benefits Pension
Total
fixed pay
Incentive
Plan/bonus
Total
variable pay
Total
remuneration
Thomas Ryder (2025) 166,667 6,000 5,642 178,309 178,309
Thomas Ryder (2024) 150,000 6,000 12,000 168,000 60,000 60,000 228,000
Joe Pollard (2025) 215,000 6,000 4,842 225,842 108,506 108,506 334,348
Joe Pollard (2024) 110,000 6,000 17,600 133,600 22,000 22,000 155,600
Steven Granite (2025) 101,999 4,800 106,799 106,799
Steven Granite (2024) 97,000 4,400 101,400 40,000 40,000 141,400
Andy Bell (2025) 85,000 85,000 85,000
Andy Bell (2024)
1
17,896 17,896 17,896
Tony Buffin (2025) 55,000 55,000 55,000
Tony Buffin (2024)
1
39,999 39,999 39,999
Peter Cowgill (2025) 10,000 10,000 10,000
Peter Cowgill (2024)
Marnie Millard (2025) 55,000 55,000 55,000
Marnie Millard (2024)
1
7,846 7,846 7,846
Deepti Velury Bakhshi (2025) 10,000 10,000 10,000
Deepti Velury Bakhshi (2024)
1. These individuals only served part of the financial year ended 31 July 2024 and therefore the amounts disclosed above are in respect of the period from their respective
appointment date to 31 July 2024.
FY25 annual bonus
For FY25, the Company operated an annual cash bonus scheme with a maximum opportunity for Executive Directors of 200% of
salary. Asset out in the Chair’s letter, Thomas Ryder and Steven Granite waived their entitlement to the annual bonus for FY25
andtherefore only Joe Pollard participated in the scheme.
For FY25, the annual bonus was based solely on adjusted EBITDA performance as set out below.
Measure Weighting
Threshold
(0%)
Maximum
(100%)
FY25
performance
Outcome
(% of max)
Outcome
(£)
Adjusted EBITDA
1
(before executive
bonuses) 100% £29.3m £37.0m £31.0m 21.7% £108,506
1. Adjusted EBITDA is defined as an alternative performance measure, please see page 105.
77
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT
CONTINUED
Statement of Directors’ shareholding and share interests (audited)
Director
Ordinary shares as at
31 July 2025
Awards subject
to continued employment
Vested but
unexercised options
Total shareholding
and share interests
Shareholding
requirement met?Incentive Plan
Executive Directors
Thomas Ryder 85,662,494 85,662,494 Y
Joe Pollard 1,195,704 1,195,704 Y
Steven Granite 14,507,601 14,507,601 Y
Chair and Non‑Executive Directors
Andy Bell 5,922,484 5,922,484
Tony Buffin 950,000 950,000
Marnie Millard
Peter Cowgill 5,000,000 5,000,000
Deepti Velury
Bakhshi
There have been no movements in the Directors’ share interests between the financial year end to the date of this report.
Directors’ share ownership guidelines (audited)
Director
Shareholding requirement
(% of salary)
Shareholding as at 31 July 2025
(% of salary)
1
Shareholding
requirement met?
Thomas Ryder 150% 32,064% Yes
Joe Pollard 150% 627% Yes
Steven Granite 150% 7,602% Yes
1. Based on the closing share price of £1.31 on 31 July 2025.
All share options which existed at the start of the year to 31 July 2025 were exercised during the year and there were no share
options issued but unexercised as at 31 July 2025.
Payments to past Directors (audited)
There were no payments to past Directors in the financial year.
Payments for loss of office (audited)
There were no payments for loss of office in the financial year.
Performance graph
The graph below shows the value of £100 invested in the Company’s shares since listing compared to the FTSE All‑Share index.
This index was chosen as the Group has been a constituent since the IPO in 2024. Thegraph shows the Total Shareholder Return
generated by both the movement in share value and the reinvestment over the same period of dividend income. It should be noted
that the Company listed on 29 October 2024 and, therefore, only has a listed share price for the period from 29 October 2024 to
31July2025.
50
100
150
Applied NutritionFTSE All-Share
31 July 2025
TSR (rebased to 100)
29 October 2024
113.438
95.0625
78
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
Chief Executive Officer historic remuneration
The table below outlines the Group CEO’s single figure for total remuneration, and annual bonus and LTIP outcomes as a
percentage of maximum opportunity, and will be built up over a period of ten years:
2025 (Thomas Ryder)
Incentive Plan payout (% of maximum opportunity)
CEO single figure of remuneration (£’000) 178
Annual percentage change in remuneration of Directors and employees
Thomas Ryder, Joe Pollard and Steven Granite were the only individuals to serve as a Director for the whole of the financial years
to 31 July 2024 and 2025 respectively. As the other Directors did not serve for the whole of both years they have been excluded
from this table, but will be included going forward. The change in the salaries, bonus and benefits compared to those of the wider
workforce is set out below.
Salary/fees
1
2024 to 2025
Benefits
2024 to 2025
Bonus
2024 to 2025
Executive Directors
Thomas Ryder +6% 0% ‑100%
2
Joe Pollard +72% 0% +393%
Steven Granite +5% +9.0% ‑100%
2
Wider workforce +4% +36,554%
1. Employer contributions to pensions have been included in the salary/fees column.
2. Thomas Ryder and Steven Granite waived their right to participate in the Incentive Plan for 2025, meaning that no bonus was paid for the financial year.
CEO to employee pay ratio
The table below shows how the CEO’s single figure remuneration (as taken from the single figure remuneration table on page
77) compares to equivalent single figure remuneration for full‑time equivalent UK employees, ranked at the 25th, 50th and 75th
percentile. We report this under the ‘Option A’ methodology as we believe this is the most robust and accurate approach, and in
line with shareholder expectations.
Year Methodology 25th percentile pay ratio Median pay ratio 75th percentile pay ratio
2025 Option A 6:1 5:1 5:1
The total pay and benefits and the salary component of total pay and benefits for the 2025 pay and benefits of the employees at
each of the 25th percentile, the median and the 75th percentile are shown below:
25th percentile 50th percentile 75th percentile
Salary
Total pay
and benefits Salary
Total pay
and benefits Salary
Total pay
and benefits
2025 £28,922 £30,983 £32,420 £35,276 £36,363 £40,683
Base salaries of all employees, including the Executive Directors, are set with reference to a range of factors including market
practice, experience and performance in role. The Committee also notes that the CEO’s remuneration package is weighted more
heavily towards variable pay (combined Incentive Plan) than those of the wider workforce due to the nature of the role, and this
means the ratio is likely to fluctuate depending on the performance of the business and associated outcomes of incentive plans in
each year.
79
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
Relative importance of spend on pay
The following table sets out the amounts paid in share buybacks and dividends, and total remuneration paid to all employees:
Payouts
2025 (£)
Dividends 14,700,000
Share buybacks
Total employee remuneration 8,004,442
Summary of shareholder voting
There is no historical voting to disclose on Directors’ remuneration as the 2026 AGM will be the Company’s first as a publicly listed
company. AGM voting outcomes will be disclosed in future Reports.
Adviser to the Remuneration Committee
Prior to Admission, the Company appointed PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP (PwC) to provide advice on executive remuneration
matters and views on shareholder perspectives as part of the review of its Remuneration Policy for senior employees, including
Executive Directors. The Committee regularly reviews and satisfies itself that the advice received is independent and objective.
PwC is a member of the Remuneration Consultants Group and the voluntary Code of Conduct of that body is designed to ensure
objective and independent advice is given to remuneration committees. There are processes in place to ensure the advice
received by the Committee is independent of any support provided to management. The Committee is therefore of the view that
PwC provided independent remuneration advice to the Committee and does not have any connections with the Group or any
Director that may impair their independence.
During the year, PwC were paid £47,400 for their advice to the Company and the Committee on these matters. Fees were charged
on atime‑spent plus expenses basis.
REMUNERATION COMMITTEE REPORT
CONTINUED
80
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
Implementation of Policy for FY26
The implementation of the Policy will be consistent with that outlined in the Policy table on pages 69 to 71.
KEY FEATURE
IMPLEMENTATION IN FY26
Base salary
Normally reviewed annually.
The Committee considers a range of factors when
determining salaries, including pay increases throughout the
Group, responsibilities of the role, individual performance
and market data.
The CEO’s and COO’s salaries that were agreed on IPO
have been put into effect, being £350,000 and £250,000
respectively, effective from 1 August 2025. This follows their
waiving of the increase that was proposed on IPO during
FY25.
The CFO’s salary has not been increased and remains at
£250,000.
Pensions
Pension contributions are paid only in respect of base salary.
The Executive Directors’ pensions are set in line with the
pension level received by the majority of the employee
population.
The CEO and CFO maximum pension contribution is up to 3%
of salary between the lower and upper earnings threshold
(in line with the wider workforce) respectively.
The COO has opted out of receiving a pension contribution.
Incentive Plan
Maximum opportunity of 200% of salary for the CEO, CFO
and COO.
Malus and clawback provisions apply.
For FY26, the maximum incentive opportunity for the CEO,
CFO and COO is 100% of salary.
The performance measures for the FY26 Incentive Plan are
as follows:
adjusted EBITDA (70%); and
revenue (30%).
The performance targets will be set following the usual
process, considering internal and consensus forecasts and
the key strategic priorities for the Group in FY26.
The performance targets are considered commercially
sensitive and will therefore be disclosed in next year’s
Report.
The Committee has discretion to amend the formulaic
outcome under the Incentive Plan to ensure that outcomes
are reflective of business performance, including, but not
limited to, assessing whether there has been sufficient
progress on delivering the governance transformation
programme.
For FY26, the Chair of the Board and Non‑Executive Director fees remain unchanged at £100,000 and £60,000 respectively.
On behalf of the Remuneration Committee
Marnie Millard
Chair of the Remuneration Committee
7 November 2025
81
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
The information required to be disclosed under UK Listing Rule 6.6.1R, where applicable to the Company, can be found in this
Annual Report and Accounts on the pages set out below.
UKLR 6.6.1R subsection Description Section Pages
1 Interest capitalised Not applicable Not applicable
2 Publication of unaudited financial information Not applicable Not applicable
3 Details of long‑term incentive schemes Remuneration report 70
4 Waiver of emoluments by Directors Remuneration report 67
5 Waiver of future emoluments by Directors Not applicable Not applicable
6 Non‑pre‑emptive allotments for cash Not applicable Not applicable
7 Non‑pre‑emptive allotments for cash (subsidiaries) Not applicable Not applicable
8 Disclosures re any parent of the Company Not applicable Not applicable
9 Contracts of significance Directors’ report
(thissection)
Not applicable
10 Provision of services by controlling shareholder Not applicable Not applicable
11 Dividend waivers Not applicable Not applicable
12 Agreements to waive future dividends Not applicable Not applicable
13 Independence from controlling shareholder Not applicable Not applicable
The Directors hereby present their
report, together with the audited
financial statements, for the year ended
31July2025.
Applied Nutrition plc is incorporated
as a public company limited by shares
and is registered in England and Wales
with the registered number 09131749.
Its registered office is 2 Acornfield Road,
Knowsley Industrial Park, Liverpool
L337UG.
This report contains the additional
information the Directors are required
to include in the Annual Report and
Accounts in accordance with the
Companies Act 2006 and the Listing
Rules.
As permitted by s.414C(11) of the
Large and Medium‑sized Companies
and Groups (Accounts and Reports)
Regulations 2008, the following
disclosures have been included in the
Strategic Report on pages 8 to 17, rather
than in this Directors’ report:
Disclosure
LIKELY FUTURE DEVELOPMENTS
OFTHEBUSINESS
Strategic Report Pages 16 and 17
INFORMATION ON RESEARCH AND
DEVELOPMENT ACTIVITIES
Strategic Report Page 10
DIRECTORS’
REPORT
Directors
The Directors of the Company who
served throughout the period from
1August 2024 to 31 July 2025 (the
“year”) and up to the signing of this
report (or such shorter time as indicated)
are set out below.
Andy Bell
Tony Buffin
Peter Cowgill (appointed 2 June 2025)
Steven Granite
Marnie Millard
Alun Peacock (resigned
26September2024)
Dominic Platt (resigned
26September2024)
Joe Pollard
Thomas Ryder
Deepti Velury Bakhshi (appointed
2June2025)
Appointment and removal
ofDirectors
The rules about the appointment and
removal of Directors are contained in the
Company’s articles of association (the
Articles”). Directors may be appointed
by a resolution of the Board or by
ordinary resolution of the shareholders.
Shareholders also have the power to
remove Directors by special resolution or
by ordinary resolution of which special
notice has been given in accordance with
the Companies Act 2006.
The Articles also stipulate that all
Directors appointed by Board resolution
be subject to election by ordinary
resolution of the shareholders at the next
Annual General Meeting of the Company.
All Directors will be seeking election by
shareholders at the Company’s inaugural
AGM to be held in January 2026. In line
with the UK Corporate Governance Code
and best practice, all Directors will seek
election or re‑election by shareholders at
each AGM.
82
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
Powers of the Directors
General
The Directors may exercise all the
powers of the Company save for those
required to be done by the Company
in general meeting and subject to any
direction that the Company gives to the
Board by passing a special resolution
and any other restrictions imposed by
relevant law including the Companies
Act2006.
Share buybacks
Subject to the prior approval of
shareholders in a general meeting, the
Directors may exercise the Company’s
power to purchase its own shares in
accordance with the Companies Act 2006.
There were no share buybacks in FY25
or FY24.
Directors’ indemnities
The Company has granted qualifying
third‑party indemnity provisions to each
of its Directors under section 234 of the
Companies Act 2006. These indemnities
were in force throughout the financial
year and remain in force as at the
date of this report. These indemnities
provide the Directors with protection
against certain liabilities incurred
in the execution of their duties as
Directors of the Company, to the extent
permitted by law. The Company also
maintains Directors’ and officers’ liability
insurancecover.
Amendments to the Articles
The Company’s articles of association
may only be amended by a special
resolution of the shareholders in
accordance with the Companies Act 2006.
Dividend
The Directors are not recommending
a final dividend in respect of the year
(FY24: £nil). A dividend of £14.7 million
was paid during FY25 prior to the listing
on the London Stock Exchange.
Political donations
The Company did not make any political
donations, incur any political expenditure,
or make any contributions to any non‑UK
political party during the year.
Financial instruments
An analysis of the Company’s financial
instruments, risk management objectives
and its exposure to credit and liquidity
risk are disclosed in note 23 to the
consolidated financial statements on
pages 118 to 121.
Branches outside the UK
The Company has a United States
office. This was based in Dallas, Texas
throughout the year and relocated to
Nashville, Tennessee in August 2025.
Relationships with customers
and suppliers
The Directors acknowledge their
responsibility to have regard to the
need to foster the Company’s business
relationships with suppliers, customers
and others. The Board exercises this
responsibility through its leadership of
the Company and the establishment of
its values and culture, and takes this into
account as relevant when taking material
decisions. More information about how
the Company has regard for stakeholder
views in its decision‑making is provided
in the s172 statement on pages 32 to 35.
Share capital
The Company has one class of shares
in issue and as at 31 July 2025, the
Company’s issued share capital
consisted of 250,000,000 ordinary shares
of .02 pence each. The rights attached
to each share are identical and each
share carries equal rights to dividends,
return of capital on the winding up of
the Company and one vote on a poll at
general meetings of the Company. There
are no securities carrying special rights.
Restrictions on transfer
For a twelve‑month lock‑in period
from the date of admission to trading
on the London Stock Exchange (being
24October 2024), each of the Directors
at the time of IPO has agreed that,
subject to certain customary exceptions,
they will not dispose of any of the
Company’s shares that they may hold.
For the twelve‑month period thereafter,
they have each agreed not to make
any disposals other than through
the Company’s broker, with a view to
maintaining an orderly market in the
Company’s securities. Peter Cowgill has
also undertaken not to dispose of any
shares he owns in the Company prior to
24 October 2025 other than through the
Company’s broker.
83
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
DIRECTORS’ REPORT
CONTINUED
Share capital continued
Significant shareholdings
As at 31 July 2025 and up to 6 November 2025
1
, being the latest practicable date prior to the signing of this report, the Company
hadbeen notified of the following disclosable interests of 3% or more in the Company’s ordinary share capital in accordance with
DTR 5.
Shareholder Number of shares
Percentage of issued
share capital
Thomas Ryder 85,662,494 34.26%
JD Sports Fashion plc 24,445,905 9.77%
Steven Granite 14,507,601 5.80%
Pentwater Capital Management LP
2
12,512,336 5.00%
Notes
1. The Company has also been notified of several movements in UBS Group AG’s notifiable indirect interests in the Company’s shares during the period from 2 June 2025
onwards. These interests have fluctuated from over 6% to under 5%. Please refer to the Company’s website or the London Stock Exchange for the latest position and
historical movements.
2. Pentwater’s voting rights are held indirectly through financial instruments as disclosed via RNS on 31 March 2025. All other significant interests are via direct shareholdings
in the Company’s ordinary shares.
Streamlined Energy and Carbon
Reporting (SECR)
SEE THE SECR REPORT WITHIN OUR
SUSTAINABILITY SECTION – PAGE 22
Significant agreements
On 14 October 2024, the Company
entered into a sterling Revolving Credit
Facility (RCF) agreement with The Royal
Bank of Scotland plc. The purpose of the
RCF is for general corporate and working
capital purposes of the Group, as well
as to finance permitted acquisitions
and capital expenditure of the Group.
The quantum of the RCF is £10,000,000
with an uncommitted accordion option
for up to £10,000,000. The terms of the
RCF include: (i) the Company as initial
borrower; (ii) a term of 36 months; (iii)
the margin being 1.7% above SONIA;
(iv) the provision of quarterly financial
information and an annual budget; (v) a
net leverage covenant set at 2:1 (total
debt to adjusted EBITDA) and interest
cover (EBITDA to net finance charges) set
at 3:1; (vi) the provision of guarantees by
certain Group companies that become
material from time to time in respect of
the obligations under the RCF; and (vii)
secured by all asset security granted by
the Company and certain other material
Group companies. The Company can
terminate the RCF at any time without
penalty and therefore, if other forms
of debt finance are more commercially
beneficial, the Company can do so and
utilise those other forms without charge.
The RCF was not utilised during FY25.
Information provided to the auditor
The Directors hereby confirm that:
so far as the Directors are aware, there
is no relevant audit information of
which the auditor is unaware; and
the Directors have taken all the steps
that they ought to have taken as
Directors to make themselves aware of
any relevant audit information and to
establish that the auditor is aware of
that information.
Annual General Meeting
The Company’s inaugural Annual
General Meeting will be held at 11.00am
on 8 January 2026 at the Company’s
registered office. Further details,
including the resolutions to be proposed
at the meeting, are set out in the Notice
of Meeting which is provided to all
shareholders within the prescribed
timescales.
Independent auditor
The Company’s auditor, BDO LLP, has
indicated its willingness to continue in
office and a resolution to reappoint BDO
LLP as auditor of the Company will be
proposed at the 2026 AGM.
This Directors’ report was approved
by the Board of Directors on
7November2025 and signed on
itsbehalf by:
Joe Pollard
Chief Financial Officer
84
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STATEMENT OF DIRECTORS’
RESPONSIBILITIES
Directors’ responsibilities
The Directors are responsible for
preparing the Annual Report and the
financial statements in accordance
withapplicable law and regulations.
Company law requires the Directors
to prepare financial statements for
each financial year. Under that law the
Directors are required to prepare the
Group financial statements in accordance
with UK‑adopted international accounting
standards and have elected to prepare
the Company financial statements
in accordance with United Kingdom
Generally Accepted Accounting Practice
(United Kingdom Accounting Standards
and applicable law). Under company
law the Directors must not approve the
financial statements unless they are
satisfied that they give a true and fair
view of the state of affairs of the Group
and Company and of the profit or loss for
the Group for that period.
In preparing these financial statements,
the Directors are required to:
select suitable accounting policies
andthen apply them consistently;
make judgements and accounting
estimates that are reasonable and
prudent;
state whether they have been prepared
in accordance with UK‑adopted
international accounting standards,
subject to any material departures
disclosed and explained in the financial
statements;
prepare the financial statements on
the going concern basis unless it is
inappropriate to presume that the
Group and the Company will continue
inbusiness; and
prepare a Directors’ report, a strategic
report and Directors’ remuneration
report which comply with the
requirements of the Companies
Act2006.
The Directors are responsible for
keeping adequate accounting records
that are sufficient to show and explain
the Company’s transactions and disclose
with reasonable accuracy at any time the
financial position of the Company and
enable them to ensure that the financial
statements comply with the Companies
Act 2006.
They are also responsible for
safeguarding the assets of the Company
and hence for taking reasonable steps
for the prevention and detection of
fraud and other irregularities. The
Directors are responsible for ensuring
that the Annual Report and Accounts,
taken as a whole, are fair, balanced
and understandable and provides the
information necessary for shareholders
to assess the Group’s performance,
business model and strategy.
Website publication
The Directors are responsible for
ensuring the Annual Report and the
financial statements are made available
on a website. Financial statements are
published on the Company’s website in
accordance with legislation in the United
Kingdom governing the preparation and
dissemination of financial statements,
which may vary from legislation in other
jurisdictions. The maintenance and
integrity of the Company’s website is
the responsibility of the Directors. The
Directors’ responsibility also extends
to the ongoing integrity of the financial
statements contained therein.
Directors’ responsibilities pursuant
to DTR4
The Directors confirm that to the best of
their knowledge:
the financial statements have been
prepared in accordance with the
applicable set of accounting standards,
give a true and fair view of the assets,
liabilities, financial position and profit
and loss of the Group; and
the Annual Report includes a fair review
of the development and performance of
the business and the financial position
of the Group and Company, together
with a description of the principal risks
and uncertainties that they face.
Thomas Ryder
Chief Executive Officer
7 November 2025
Joe Pollard
Chief Financial Officer
7 November 2025
85
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
INDEPENDENT AUDITORS’ REPORT
TO THE MEMBERS OF APPLIED NUTRITION PLC
Opinion on the financial statements
In our opinion:
the financial statements give a true and
fair view of the state of the Group’s and
of the Parent Company’s affairs as at
31 July 2025 and of the Group’s profit
and cash flows for the year then ended;
the Group financial statements have
been properly prepared in accordance
with UK adopted international
accounting standards
the Parent Company financial
statements have been properly
prepared in accordance with United
Kingdom Generally Accepted
Accounting Practice and as applied in
accordance with the provisions of the
Companies Act 2006, and
the financial statements have been
prepared in accordance with the
requirements of the Companies
Act 2006.
We have audited the financial statements
of Applied Nutrition plc (the ‘Parent
Company’) and its subsidiaries (the
‘Group’) for the year ended 31 July2025
which comprise the Consolidated
Statement of Comprehensive Income,
Consolidated Statement of Financial
Position, Consolidated Statement
of Changes in Equity, Consolidated
Statement of Cash Flows, Parent
Company Statement of Financial Position
and Parent Company Statement of
Changes in Equity and notes to the
financial statements, including material
accounting policy information.
The financial reporting framework that
has been applied in the preparation
of the Group financial statements
is applicable law and UK adopted
international accounting standards.
Thefinancial reporting framework that
has been applied in the preparation
of the Parent Company financial
statements is applicable law and
United Kingdom Accounting Standards,
including Financial Reporting Standard
101 Reduced Disclosure Framework
(UnitedKingdom Generally Accepted
Accounting Practice).
Basis for opinion
We conducted our audit in accordance
with International Standards on Auditing
(UK) (ISAs (UK)) and applicable law. Our
responsibilities under those standards
are further described in the Auditor’s
responsibilities for the audit of the
financial statements section of our
report. We believe that the audit evidence
we have obtained is sufficient and
appropriate to provide a basis for our
opinion. Our audit opinion is consistent
with the additional report to the Audit
and Risk Committee.
Independence
Following the recommendation of the
Audit and Risk Committee, we were
appointed by the members on 31July2024
to audit the financial statements for the
year ended 31July2024 and subsequent
financial periods. The period of total
uninterrupted engagement including
retenders and reappointments is two
years, covering the years ended
31July2024 to 31July2025. We remain
independent of the Group and the Parent
Company in accordance with the ethical
requirements that are relevant to our
audit of the financial statements in the
UK, including the FRC’s Ethical Standard
as applied to listed public interest
entities, and we have fulfilled our other
ethical responsibilities in accordance
with these requirements. The non‑audit
services prohibited by that standard
were not provided to the Group or the
Parent Company.
Conclusions relating to
goingconcern
In auditing the financial statements,
wehave concluded that the Directors’
use of the going concern basis of
accounting in the preparation of the
financial statements is appropriate. Our
evaluation of the Directors’ assessment
of the Group and the Parent Company’s
ability to continue to adopt the going
concern basis of accounting included:
Challenging the assumptions used in
the Directors’ cash flow forecasts, using
our knowledge of the business and the
sector;
Testing the mathematical accuracy
of the Directors’ forecasts, assessing
historical forecasting accuracy
and understanding the Directors’
consideration of downside sensitivity
analysis and reverse stress testing;
Reperforming sensitivity analysis on the
Directors’ base case and stressed case
scenarios, considering the likelihood
of downside scenarios occurring, and
understanding and challenging the
mitigating actions the Directors’ would
take under these scenarios; and
Assessing the going concern
disclosures against the requirements of
the accounting standards and assessing
the consistency of the disclosures
with the Directors’ forecasts and
assessment.
Based on the work we have performed,
we have not identified any material
uncertainties relating to events
or conditions that, individually or
collectively, may cast significant doubt
on the Group and the Parent Company’s
ability to continue as a going concern
for a period of at least twelve months
from when the financial statements are
authorised for issue.
In relation to the Parent Company’s
reporting on how it has applied the UK
Corporate Governance Code, we have
nothing material to add or draw attention
to in relation to the Directors’ statement
in the financial statements about whether
the Directors considered it appropriate
to adopt the going concern basis of
accounting.
Our responsibilities and the
responsibilities of the Directors with
respect to going concern are described
inthe relevant sections of this report.
Overview
Key audit
matters
2025
Revenue recognition
P
2025 is the first year in which
the independent auditor’s report
has included reporting of Key
Audit Matters, as such the Key
Audit Matter reported above
was not reported in 2024.
Materiality
Group financial statements
as a whole
£1.4 million based on 5% of
profit before tax.
86
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
An overview of the scope
ofouraudit
Our Group audit was scoped by obtaining
an understanding of the Group and its
environment, the applicable financial
reporting framework and the Group’s
system of internal control. On the basis
of this, we identified and assessed the
risks of material misstatement of the
Group financial statements including
withrespect to the consolidation
process. We then applied professional
judgement to focus our audit procedures
on the areas that posed the greatest
risks to the group financial statements.
Wecontinually assessed risks
throughout our audit, revising the
risks where necessary, with the aim
of reducing the group risk of material
misstatement to an acceptable level, in
order to provide abasis for our opinion.
Components in scope
The Group consists of three active
legal entities, including the Parent
Company. Based on the nature and
the different locations of the entities,
as part of performing our Group audit,
we have determined there to be three
components in scope. The nature of the
entities in the Group are as follows:
Applied Nutrition plc is the Parent
Company, which is the main trading
entity and holds the investment in the
other companies in the group
AN USA Holdings Inc is a trading entity
operating in different jurisdiction
Applied Nutrition Colombia SAS
is a non‑trading entity set up in a
differentjurisdiction
For components in scope, we used
a combination of risk assessment
procedures and further audit procedures
to obtain sufficient appropriate evidence.
These further audit procedures included:
procedures on the entire financial
information of the component, including
performing substantive procedures
procedures on one or more classes
of transactions, account balances or
disclosures
Procedures performed at the componentlevel
We performed procedures to respond to group risks of material misstatement at the
component level that included the following.
Component Component Name Entity Group Audit Scope
1 Applied
Nutrition plc
Applied
Nutrition plc
Statutory audit procedures on the entire
financial information of the component
2 AN USA
Holdings Inc
AN USA
Holdings Inc
Procedures on one or more classes
of transactions, account balances or
disclosures
3 Applied
Nutrition
Colombia SAS
Applied
Nutrition
Colombia SAS
Risk assessment procedures
The Group engagement team has
performed all procedures directly, and
has not involved component auditors
in the Group audit, except for carrying
out audit procedures during the stock
take for AN USA Holdings Inc where
individuals from the BDO US member
firm attended.
Procedures performed centrally
We considered there to be a high degree
of centralisation of financial reporting
and commonality of controls in relation
to all financial statement areas. We
therefore designed and performed
procedures centrally.
The group operates a centralised IT
function that supports IT processes for
certain components. This IT function is
subject to specified risk‑focused audit
procedures, predominantly the testing of
the relevant IT general controls and IT
application controls.
Locations
Applied Nutrition plc’s operations are
spread over a number of different
geographical locations. We visited two
out of a total of three locations. Our
teams conducted procedures in Applied
Nutrition plc’s locations in the UK,
physically attended a local stock take,
and carried out verification work at AN
USA Holdings Inc in the US, in addition
to holding video conferences with senior
management of AN USA Holdings Inc.
Climate change
Our work on the assessment of potential
impacts on climate‑related risks on
the Group’s operations and financial
statements included:
Enquiries and challenge of
management to understand the actions
they have taken to identify climate‑
related risks and their potential
impacts on the financial statements
and adequately disclose climate‑related
risks within the annual report;
Our own qualitative risk assessment
taking into consideration the sector
in which the Group operates and how
climate change affects this particular
sector; and
Review of the minutes of Board and
Audit and Risk Committee meeting and
other papers related to climate change.
We challenged the extent to which
climate‑related considerations, including
the expected cash flows from the
initiatives and commitments have
been reflected, where appropriate,
in management’s going concern
assessment.
We also assessed the consistency of
management’s disclosures included
as ‘Other Information’ on page 24 with
the financial statements and with our
knowledge obtained from the audit.
Based on our risk assessment
procedures, we did not identify there
to be any Key Audit Matters that were
materially affected by climate‑related
risks.
87
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
INDEPENDENT AUDITORS’ REPORT
TO THE MEMBERS OF APPLIED NUTRITION PLC
CONTINUED
An overview of the scope of ouraudit continued
Key audit matters
Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgement, were of most significance in our audit of the financial
statements of the current period and include the most significant assessed risks of material misstatement (whether or not due to
fraud) that we identified, including those which had the greatest effect on: the overall audit strategy, the allocation of resources
in the audit, and directing the efforts of the engagement team. These matters were addressed in the context of our audit of the
financial statements as a whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion on these matters.
Key audit matter How the scope of our audit addressed the key audit matter
Revenue Recognition
Refer to Note 2.5 (Group’s
accounting policy in respect of
revenue) and Note 4 (Group’s
revenue related disclosures)
All Group revenue is
generated from the sale of
goods and is recognised at a
point of time, as detailed at
Note 2.5.
Revenue is initially recognised
on despatch and management
then process an adjustment to
adjust the revenue recognised
based on terms of trade to
reflect when control has
passed to the customer.
We assessed that material
misstatement could arise
from improper revenue
recognition either through
error or manipulation of the
adjustment processed by
management resulting in
revenue being recognised
before control of goods has
passed to the customer.
We therefore identified the
revenue recognised before
the year end as an area with
significant risk of material
misstatement, and a Key
AuditMatter.
The audit procedures included the following:
Testing whether samples of UK, Europe and worldwide sales
despatched in pre year end risk periods were recognised in
line with the point at which control passed to the customer.
Risk periods were defined as 5 days for sales to UK customers
and 14 days for sales to International customers. This included
reviewing third party documentation, such as delivery notes, and
terms and conditions relating to the sale and checking whether
the sale was included in management’s adjustment for revenue
that should not be recognised on despatch.
Key observations:
Based on the procedures performed, we found management’s
revenue recognition policy to be in line with the requirements
of applicable accounting standards and we did not identify
inappropriate recognition of revenue in the year.
88
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
Our application of materiality
We apply the concept of materiality both in planning and performing our audit, and in evaluating the effect of misstatements.
Weconsider materiality to be the magnitude by which misstatements, including omissions, could influence the economic
decisionsof reasonable users that are taken on the basis of the financial statements.
In order to reduce to an appropriately low level the probability that any misstatements exceed materiality, we use a lower
materiality level, performance materiality, to determine the extent of testing needed. Importantly, misstatements below these
levels will not necessarily be evaluated as immaterial as we also take account of the nature of identified misstatements, and
theparticular circumstances of their occurrence, when evaluating their effect on the financial statements as a whole.
Based on our professional judgement, we determined materiality for the financial statements as a whole and performance
materiality as follows:
Group financial statements Parent company financial statements
2025
£m
2025
£m
Materiality 1.4 1.1
Basis for determining materiality Set based on 5% of profit before tax Set based on 5% of profit before tax,
capped at 95% of group materiality
Rationale for the benchmark applied We consider profit before tax to be the
most relevant measure for users of the
financial statements given the group is
publicly listed
We consider profit before tax to be the
most relevant measure for users of the
financial statements given the group is
publicly listed
Performance materiality 1.1 0.8
Basis for determining performance
materiality
75% of materiality 75% of materiality
Rationale for the percentage applied
forperformance materiality
This was considered appropriate
based on our cumulative knowledge
of the Group, the degree of estimation
in financial statements, the historic
misstatement levels, and the trade
of the Group being contained in two
principal trading companies.
This was considered appropriate based
on our cumulative knowledge of the
Company, the degree of estimation in
financial statements, and the historic
misstatement levels.
Component performance materiality
For the purposes of our Group audit opinion, we set performance materiality for each component of the Group, apart from the
Parent Company whose materiality and performance materiality are set out above, based on a percentage of between 60% and
65% of Group performance materiality dependent on size and our assessment of the risk of material misstatement of those
components. Component performance materiality ranged from £0.6 million to £0.7 million.
Reporting threshold
We agreed with the Audit and Risk Committee that we would report to them all individual audit differences in excess of £49,000.
We also agreed to report differences below this threshold that, in our view, warranted reporting on qualitative grounds.
89
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
INDEPENDENT AUDITORS’ REPORT
TO THE MEMBERS OF APPLIED NUTRITION PLC
CONTINUED
Other information
The directors are responsible for the other information. The other information comprises the information included in the
document entitled ‘annual report’ other than the financial statements and our auditor’s report thereon. Our opinion on the financial
statements does not cover the other information and, except to the extent otherwise explicitly stated in our report, we do not
express any form of assurance conclusion thereon. Our responsibility is to read the other information and, in doing so, consider
whether the other information is materially inconsistent with the financial statements or our knowledge obtained in the course
of the audit, or otherwise appears to be materially misstated. If we identify such material inconsistencies or apparent material
misstatements, we are required to determine whether this gives rise to a material misstatement in the financial statements
themselves. If, based on the work we have performed, we conclude that there is a material misstatement of this other information,
we are required to report that fact.
We have nothing to report in this regard.
Corporate governance statement
The UK Listing Rules require us to review the Directors’ statement in relation to going concern, longer‑term viability and that part
of the Corporate Governance Statement relating to the Parent Company’s compliance with the provisions of the UK Corporate
Governance Code specified for our review.
Based on the work undertaken as part of our audit, we have concluded that each of the following elements of the Corporate
Governance Statement is materially consistent with the financial statements or our knowledge obtained during the audit.
Going concern and
longer‑term viability
The Directors’ statement with regards to the appropriateness of adopting the going
concern basis of accounting and any material uncertainties identified set out on
page 48;
The Directors’ explanation as to their assessment of the Group’s prospects, the
period this assessment covers and why the period is appropriate set out on page 48;
and
The Directors’ statement on whether they have a reasonable expectation that the
group will be able to continue in operation and meet its liabilities set out on page 48.
Other Code provisions Directors’ statement on fair, balanced and understandable set out on page 85;
Board’s confirmation that it has carried out a robust assessment of the emerging
and principal risks set out on page 43;
The section of the annual report that describes the review of effectiveness of risk
management and internal control systems set out on page 42; and
The section describing the work of the Audit and Risk Committee set out on page 59.
90
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
Other Companies Act 2006 reporting
Based on the responsibilities described below and our work performed during the course of the audit, we are required by the
Companies Act 2006 and ISAs (UK) to report on certain opinions and matters as described below.
Strategic report and Directors’ report In our opinion, based on the work undertaken in the course of the audit:
the information given in the Strategic report and the Directors’ report for the
financial year for which the financial statements are prepared is consistent with
thefinancial statements; and
the Strategic report and the Directors’ report have been prepared in accordance
with applicable legal requirements.
In the light of the knowledge and understanding of the Group and Parent Company
and its environment obtained in the course of the audit, we have not identified
material misstatements in the strategic report or the Directors’ report.
Directors’ remuneration In our opinion, the part of the Directors’ remuneration report to be audited has been
properly prepared in accordance with the Companies Act 2006.
Corporate governance statement In our opinion, based on the work undertaken in the course of the audit the
information about internal control and risk management systems in relation to
financial reporting processes and about share capital structures, given in compliance
with rules 7.2.5 and 7.2.6 in the Disclosure Guidance and Transparency Rules
sourcebook made by the Financial Conduct Authority (the “FCA Rules”), is consistent
with the financial statements and has been prepared in accordance with applicable
legal requirements.
In the light of the knowledge and understanding of the Group and the Parent
Company and its environment obtained in the course of the audit, we have not
identified material misstatements in this information.
In our opinion, based on the work undertaken in the course of the audit information
about the Parent Company’s corporate governance code and practices and about its
administrative, management and supervisory bodies and their committees complies
with rules 7.2.2, 7.2.3 and 7.2.7 of the FCA Rules.
We have nothing to report arising from our responsibility to report if a corporate
governance statement has not been prepared by the Parent Company.
Matters on which we are required
to report by exception
We have nothing to report in respect of the following matters in relation to which the
Companies Act 2006 requires us to report to you if, in our opinion:
adequate accounting records have not been kept by the Parent Company, or returns
adequate for our audit have not been received from branches not visited by us; or
the Parent Company financial statements and the part of the Directors’
remunerationreport to be audited are not in agreement with the accounting
recordsand returns; or
certain disclosures of Directors’ remuneration specified by law are not made; or
we have not received all the information and explanations we require for our audit.
91
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
INDEPENDENT AUDITORS’ REPORT
TO THE MEMBERS OF APPLIED NUTRITION PLC
CONTINUED
Responsibilities of Directors
As explained more fully in the Statement
of Directors’ responsibilities, the
Directors are responsible for the
preparation of the financial statements
and for being satisfied that they give a
true and fair view, and for such internal
control as the Directors determine is
necessary to enable the preparation of
financial statements that are free from
material misstatement, whether due to
fraud or error.
In preparing the financial statements, the
Directors are responsible for assessing
the Group’s and the Parent Company’s
ability to continue as a going concern,
disclosing, as applicable, matters related
to going concern and using the going
concern basis of accounting unless the
Directors either intend to liquidate the
Group or the Parent Company or to
cease operations, or have no realistic
alternative but to do so.
Auditor’s responsibilities for the
audit of the financial statements
Our objectives are to obtain reasonable
assurance about whether the financial
statements as a whole are free from
material misstatement, whether due to
fraud or error, and to issue an auditor’s
report that includes our opinion.
Reasonable assurance is a high level
of assurance, but is not a guarantee
that an audit conducted in accordance
with ISAs (UK) will always detect a
material misstatement when it exists.
Misstatements can arise from fraud
or error and are considered material
if, individually or in the aggregate,
they could reasonably be expected
to influence the economic decisions
of userstaken on the basis of these
financial statements.
Extent to which the audit was capable of
detecting irregularities, including fraud
Irregularities, including fraud, are
instances of non‑compliance with laws
and regulations. We design procedures
in line with our responsibilities, outlined
above, to detect material misstatements
in respect of irregularities, including
fraud. The extent to which our
procedures are capable of detecting
irregularities, including fraud is
detailedbelow:
Non-compliance with laws and
regulations
Based on:
Our understanding of the Group and the
industry in which it operates;
Discussion with management and those
charged with governance; and
Obtaining an understanding of the
Group’s policies and procedures
regarding compliance with laws and
regulations.
we considered the significant laws and
regulations to be:
UK adopted international accounting
standards;
United Kingdom Accounting Standards,
including Financial Reporting Standard
101 (The Financial Reporting Standard
in the United Kingdom and Republic
of Ireland) (United Kingdom Generally
Accepted Accounting Practice);
Companies Act 2006;
UK tax legislation; and
UK listing Rules
The Group is also subject to laws and
regulations where the consequence of
non‑compliance could have a material
effect on the amount or disclosures in
the financial statements, for example
through the imposition of fines or
litigations. We identified such laws and
regulations to be:
health and safety legislation;
GDPR and data protection legislation
Bribery Act 2010; and
Employment legislation.
Our procedures in respect of the above
included:
Review of minutes of meetings of
those charged with governance for any
instances of non‑compliance with laws
and regulations;
Review of correspondence with
regulatory and tax authorities for any
instances of non‑compliance with laws
and regulations;
Review of financial statement
disclosures and agreeing to supporting
documentation;
Involvement of tax specialists in the
audit; and
Obtain an understanding of the control
environment in monitoring compliance
with laws and regulations.
Fraud
We assessed the susceptibility of
the financial statements to material
misstatement, including fraud. Our risk
assessment procedures included:
Enquiry with management and those
charged with governance, including
theAudit and Risk Committee regarding
any known or suspected instances
offraud;
Obtaining an understanding of the
Group’s policies and procedures
relating to:
Detecting and responding to the risks
of fraud; and
Internal controls established to
mitigate risks related to fraud.
Review of minutes of meetings of
those charged with governance for any
known or suspected instances of fraud;
Discussion amongst the engagement
team as to how and where fraud might
occur in the financial statements; and
Performing analytical procedures to
identify any unusual or unexpected
relationships that may indicate risks
ofmaterial misstatement due to fraud.
92
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
Based on our risk assessment, we
considered the areas most susceptible
to fraud to be management override of
controls and revenue recognition in the
period running up to the year end.
Our procedures in respect of the above
included:
Testing a sample of journal entries
throughout the year, which met defined
risk criteria, by agreeing to supporting
documentation;
Performing sample testing to address
unpredictability in fraud on areas such
as directors expenses and review of
supplier payment details; and
The procedures described in the
revenue recognition key audit matter,
described above.
We also communicated relevant
identified laws and regulations and
potential fraud risks to all engagement
team members who were all deemed
to have appropriate competence and
capabilities and remained alert to any
indications of fraud or non‑compliance
with laws and regulations throughout
theaudit.
Our audit procedures were designed
to respond to risks of material
misstatement in the financial statements,
recognising that the risk of not detecting
a material misstatement due to fraud
is higher than the risk of not detecting
one resulting from error, as fraud may
involve deliberate concealment by, for
example, forgery, misrepresentations or
through collusion. There are inherent
limitations in the audit procedures
performed and the further removed
non‑compliance with laws and
regulations is from the events and
transactions reflected in the financial
statements, the less likely we are to
become aware of it.
A further description of our
responsibilities is available on
the Financial Reporting Council’s
website at: www.frc.org.uk/
auditorsresponsibilities. This description
forms part of our auditor’s report.
Use of our report
This report is made solely to the Parent
Company’s members, as a body, in
accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of
the Companies Act 2006. Our audit work
has been undertaken so that we might
state to the Parent Company’s members
those matters we are required to state
to them in an auditor’s report and for
no other purpose. To the fullest extent
permitted by law, we do not accept or
assume responsibility to anyone other
than the Parent Company and the Parent
Company’s members as a body, for our
audit work, for this report, or for the
opinions we have formed.
Gareth Singleton
(Senior Statutory Auditor)
For and on behalf of BDO LLP, Statutory
Auditor
Leeds, UK
Date: 7 November 2025
BDO LLP is a limited liability partnership
registered in England and Wales (with
registered number OC305127).
93
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 JULY 2025
Year ended Year ended
31 Jul 31 Jul
2025 2024
Note£m£m
Revenue
4
107 .1
86.2
Cost of sales
(57 .8)
(44.9)
Gross profit
49.3
41.3
Administrative expenses
(21.2)
(17.6)
Adjusted operating profit
1
29.8
25.1
Costs relating to Initial Public Offering
(1.7)
(1.2)
Share‑based payment expense
(0.2)
Operating profit
28.1
23.7
Finance income
9
0.5
0.7
Finance expense
9
(0.1)
(0.1)
Profit before taxation
28.5
24.3
Taxation
10
(7 .4)
(5.6)
Profit for the year attributable to equity shareholders
21.1
18.7
Earnings per share for profit attributable to the owners of the parent
Basic and diluted (pence)
11
8.4
7. 5
Other comprehensive income:
Exchange losses arising on translation of foreign operations
(0.4)
Deferred tax
10
(0.4)
0.4
Total comprehensive income for the period
20.3
19.1
1. Adjusted operating profit is a non‑IFRS financial measure and is defined as statutory operating profit of £28.1 million (FY24: £23.7 million) before £1.7 million
(FY24:£1.4million) of costs related to the Group’s Initial Public Offering and share‑based payment for schemes closed pre‑IPO.
The results relate to continuing operations (2024: continuing operations).
The notes on pages 98 to 122 form part of these Group financial statements.
94
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION
AS AT 31 JULY 2025
31 Jul 31 Jul
2025 2024
Note£m£m
Non‑current assets
Property, plant and equipment
13
2.0
1.7
Right‑of‑use assets
14
3.0
1.8
Intangible assets
15
0.1
Deferred tax assets
10
1.2
0.6
6.3
4.1
Current assets
Inventories
16
22.8
19.5
Trade and other receivables
17
27 .4
17.3
Cash and cash equivalents
18
18.5
18.7
68.7
55.5
Total assets
75.0
59.6
Current liabilities
Lease liabilities
14
(0.6)
(0.3)
Trade and other payables
19
(17 .1)
(9.5)
(17 .7)
(9.8)
Non‑current liabilities
Deferred tax liabilities
10
(0.3)
Lease liabilities
14
(2.4)
(1.5)
Provision for liabilities
20
(0.3)
(0.2)
(3.0)
(1.7)
Total liabilities
(20.7)
(11.5)
Net assets
54.3
48.1
Equity
Share capital
21
0.1
Share‑based payment reserve
0.2
0.2
Foreign exchange reserve
0.2
0.1
Retained earnings
53.8
47.8
Total equity
54.3
48.1
Applied Nutrition plc is registered in England and Wales (company number: 09131749).
The Group financial statements on pages 94 to 122 were approved and authorised for issue by the Board of Directors on
7 November 2025 and were signed on its behalf by:
Thomas Ryder Joe Pollard
Director Director
The notes on pages 98 to 122 form part of these Group financial statements.
95
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN EQUITY
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 JULY 2025
Share‑based Foreign
Share payment exchange Retained Total
capital reserve reserve earnings equity
£m£m£m£m£m
As at 1 August 2023
0.1
28.7
28.8
Comprehensive income:
Profit for the year
18.7
18.7
Share‑based payments
0.4
0.4
Transactions with owners:
Share‑based payments
0.2
0.2
Balance at 31 July 2024
0.2
0.1
47.8
48.1
Comprehensive income:
Profit for the year
21.1
21.1
Other comprehensive income/(loss)
0.1
(0.9)
(0.8)
Transactions with owners:
Bonus share issue
0.1
(0.1)
Dividends paid
(14.7)
(14.7)
Tax included directly in equity
0.6
0.6
Balance at 31 July 2025
0.1
0.2
0.2
53.8
54.3
The notes on pages 98 to 122 form part of these Group financial statements.
96
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF CASH FLOWS
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 JULY 2025
Year ended Year ended
31 Jul 2025 31 Jul 2024
Note£m£m
Cash flows from operating activities
Operating profit
28.1
23.7
Adjustments for:
Depreciation and amortisation charges
13 & 14
1.1
0.9
Share‑based payment expense
22
0.2
Operating cash flows before movements in working capital
29.2
24.8
Increase in inventories
(3.4)
(6.5)
Increase in trade and other receivables
(10.9)
(6.0)
Increase in trade and other payables
7. 0
4.1
Net cash generated from operations
21.9
16.4
Income tax paid
(6.3)
(9.7)
Net cash inflow from operating activities
15.6
6.7
Cash flows from investing activities
Purchase of tangible fixed assets
13
(1.0)
(1.0)
Interest received
0.6
0.6
Net cash outflow from investing activities
(0.4)
(0.4)
Cash flows from financing activities
Dividends paid
12
(14.7)
Principal paid on lease liability
14
(0.3)
(0.3)
Interest paid on lease liability
14
(0.1)
(0.1)
Net cash outflow from financing activities
(15.1)
(0.4)
Net increase in cash and cash equivalents
0.1
5.9
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of period
18.7
12.7
Effect of foreign exchange differences
(0.3)
0.1
Cash and cash equivalents at end of period
18
18.5
18.7
The notes on pages 98 to 122 form part of these Group financial statements.
97
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
NOTES TO THE GROUP FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 JULY 2025
1 GENERAL INFORMATION
Applied Nutrition plc (the “Company”)
is a public company limited by shares,
registered and incorporated in England
and Wales under the Companies Act 2006
(registered company number 09131749).
The Company re‑registered as a public
limited company on 1 October 2024
and its ordinary share capital was listed
on the Main Market of the London Stock
Exchange on 24 October 2024.
The address of the Company’s registered
office is 2 Acornfield Road, Knowsley
Industrial Park, Liverpool, England,
L33 7UG. The Company is the parent
and ultimate parent of the Group;
the financial statements comprise
the results of the Company and its
subsidiary undertakings (the “Group”).
The principal activities of the Group are
the formulation, manufacture, wholesale
and retail of sports nutrition, health and
wellness products.
The Group financial statements were
approved by the Board for issue on
7 November 2025.
2 SUMMARY OF THE GROUP’S
MATERIAL ACCOUNTING POLICIES
The Group’s material accounting policies
are set out below.
2.1 Basis of preparation
The Group financial statements have
been prepared in accordance with
UK adopted International Accounting
Standards (IFRS) and with the
requirements of the Companies Act 2006
applicable to companies reporting under
those standards. The Group financial
statements have been prepared on
a going concern basis and under the
historical cost convention. The Directors
consider it appropriate to adopt the going
concern basis of accounting in preparing
these financial statements.
The preparation of financial statements
in conformity with IFRS requires the use
of certain critical accounting estimates,
which are outlined in the critical
accounting estimates and judgements
section of these accounting policies.
It also requires management to
exercise its judgement in the process
of applying the Group’s accounting
policies. The accounting policies have
been applied consistently to all periods
presented, other than where new policies
have been adopted.
The consolidated financial statements
are prepared in GBP. Amounts are
rounded to the nearest million, unless
otherwise stated.
2.2 Going concern
The Group’s profit before taxation for the
period amounted to £28.5 million (2024:
£24.3 million). The Group has net assets
of £54.3 million (2024: £48.1 million),
including cash and cash equivalents of
£18.5 million (being after the payment
of a pre‑IPO dividend to shareholders)
compared to £18.7 million at 31 July 2024
(where there was no dividend paid).
As at 31 July 2025, the Group also has
£10.0 million available loan finance in the
form of a Revolving Credit Facility (RCF)
which has not been drawn down.
The Directors have considered the
business activities as described in
the Strategic Report on pages 1 to 49,
including the organisation’s principal
risks and uncertainties disclosed on
pages 42 to 48. With due consideration
and review, the Directors have a
reasonable expectation that the Group
has adequate resources to operate over
the assessment period, being the twelve
months from the date of these financial
statements. In addition, the Directors are
not aware of any material uncertainties
that may cast significant doubt upon the
Company or Group to continue as a going
concern. Consequently, the financial
statements have been prepared on a
going concern basis for the Group and
the Company.
The Directors have assessed the
ability of the Company and the Group
to continue as a going concern using
three‑year cash flow forecasts prepared
from 31 July 2025 to 31 July 2028. This
is the timeframe of the Group’s most
recently approved strategic plan, as
approved by the Board and in addition
exceeds the period over which the Group
can reasonably plan capital investment
with certainty given the rapid growth of
the Group and change in investment that
may be required to meet such growth.
The Directors have considered forecast
expectations of performance, based
on historic data, along with available
funding options in case of unexpected,
contingent requirements.
The market in which the organisation
operates is forecast to grow annually
in the region of 8% or better.
The forecasts included several scenarios
including a base case and downside
case. The base case assumed revenue
growth during the next twelve months
on a customer‑by‑customer base for
the top ten customers, and then applied
a standard rate of growth in line with
market dynamics for the remainder of
the customer base and new potential
customers. Profitability and cash flow
assumptions were in line with recent
experience.
In the event of no further growth in the
business, it would remain profitable
and cash generative in the view of
management and therefore while
downside scenarios with no further
growth were considered, they did not
alter the view of management in terms
of going concern. Nor did scenarios
where the working capital requirement
of the business increased.
When conducting this assessment, the
Directors also considered the principal
risks and uncertainties that the Group’s
risk management process had identified.
This risk management process and an
assessment of the principal risks and
uncertainties are detailed in the risk
management report. This assessment
considered the risks themselves in
addition to mitigating actions. Of the
principal risks and uncertainties, the
effect of a product safety event or
significant damage/disruption to the
Group’s manufacturing facilities were
considered in detail. These are the
key risks that are believed to present
a risk to the going concern view of
management.
The successful initial public offering
(IPO) of the organisation on the London
Stock Exchange in late 2024 has provided
access to potential additional funding
streams and acts as a catalyst for further
controlled enhancement of the product
range with expansion across multiple
geographic locations. On 14 October
2024, the Company entered into a
sterling revolving credit facility (RCF)
agreement with The Royal Bank
of Scotland plc.
The purpose of the RCF is for general
corporate and working capital purposes
of the Group as well as to finance
permitted acquisitions and capital
expenditure of the Group.
98
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
The quantum of the RCF is £10,000,000
with an uncommitted accordion option
for up to £10,000,000. The terms of the
RCF include: (i) the Company as initial
borrower; (ii) a term of 36 months;
(iii) the margin being 1.7% above SONIA;
(iv) the provision of quarterly financial
information and an annual budget;
(v) a net leverage covenant set at 2:1 (total
debt to adjusted EBITDA) and interest
cover (EBITDA to net finance charges) set
at 3:1; (vi) the provision of guarantees by
certain Group companies that become
material from time to time in respect of
the obligations under the RCF; and (vii)
secured by all asset security granted by
the Company and certain other material
Group companies. The Company can
terminate the RCF at any time without
penalty and therefore, if other forms
of debt finance are more commercially
beneficial, the Company can do so and
utilise those other forms without charge.
Based on the assessment performed,
and with no additional knowledge of
any material uncertainty that may affect
this assessment, the Directors believe
it is appropriate to prepare the financial
statements of the Group on a going
concern basis.
2.3 New standards, amendments
and interpretations not yet adopted
The following standards and
interpretations apply for the first time to
financial reporting periods commencing
on or after 1 January 2024, and became
effective for the Group’s consolidated
financial statements for the year ended
31 July 2025, none of which have a
material impact on the Group:
Non‑current Liabilities with Covenants
(Amendments to IAS 1);
Amendments to IAS 1 Presentation of
Financial Statements: Classification of
Liabilities as Current or Non‑current;
Amendments to IFRS 16 – Lease
Liability in Sale and Leaseback; and
Supplier Finance Arrangements
(Amendments to IAS 7 and IFRS 7).
The following standards, amendments
and interpretations are not yet effective
and have not been early adopted by the
Group:
Amendments to IAS 21 Lack of
Exchangeability;
IFRS 18 Presentation and Disclosure in
Financial Statements;
IFRS 19 Subsidiaries without Public
Accountability: Disclosures; and
Amendments to IFRS 9 and IFRS 7
Classification and Measurement of
Financial Instruments.
Certain new standards, amendments
to standards, and interpretations
have been issued by the IASB that are
effective in future accounting periods
that the Group has decided not to adopt
early. These standards, amendments or
interpretations are not expected to have
a material impact on the Group.
While IFRS 18 Presentation and
Disclosure in Financial Statements will
not have any effect on the recognition
and measurement of items in the
consolidated financial statements, it
is expected to have a significant effect
on the presentation and disclosure of
certain items. These effects include
changes to categorisation and
sub‑totals in the statement of profit or
loss, aggregation/disaggregation and
labelling of information, and disclosure
of management‑defined performance
measures. The Group is currently
assessing the impact of these changes.
2.4 Basis of consolidation
Subsidiaries
The Group financial statements
incorporate the financial statements
of Applied Nutrition plc and entities
controlled by the Company (its
“subsidiaries”) made up to 31 July each
year. Control is achieved where the
Company has the power to govern the
financial and operating policies of an
investee entity so as to obtain benefits
from its activities.
Subsidiaries are fully consolidated from
the date on which control is transferred
to the Group until the date that control
ceases.
Intercompany transactions, balances
and unrealised gains (or losses) on
transactions between Group companies
are eliminated in preparing the
consolidated accounts. Accounting
policies of subsidiaries are consistent
with those policies adopted by the Group.
The Group includes foreign entities
whose functional currencies are not GBP.
On consolidation, the assets and liabilities
of those entities are translated at the
exchange rates at the reporting date and
income and expenses are translated at the
weighted average rates during the period.
Classification of costs
Allocations of costs presented
in the consolidated statement of
comprehensive income are allocated
to cost of sales when management
deem costs are directly associated with
fulfilling performance obligations under
IFRS 15, including the creation of those
products sold by the Group. Those costs
which fall outside of these allocations,
which includes all sales and marketing
associated costs, are presented within
administrative expenses, excluding
finance expenses and taxation,
in the consolidated statement of
comprehensive income.
2.5 Revenue recognition
Revenue comprises the fair value of the
consideration received, or receivable, for
the sale of goods in the ordinary course
of the Group’s activities. Revenue is
shown net of value added tax, estimated
returns, rebates and discounts, and after
eliminating sales within the Group.
IFRS 15 Revenue from Contracts with
Customers is a principle‑based model of
recognising revenue from contracts with
customers. It has a five‑step model that
requires revenue to be recognised when
control over goods are transferred to the
customer.
Revenue represents amounts chargeable
in respect of the manufacture,
wholesale and retail of products.
The Group operates through a
range of business‑to‑business and
direct‑to‑consumer channels, with all
revenue recognised at a point of time,
being when control has passed to the
customer under Incoterms®. Payment of
the transaction price is due immediately
when the customer purchases the
product, or in the case of certain trade
transactions, payable on set credit terms.
Rebates are volume based and are
established on management’s best
estimate of the amounts necessary to
meet claims by customers in respect of
these rebates. A liability is calculated at
the time of sale and updated at the end
of each reporting period for changes in
circumstances. Volume‑based rebates
represent variable consideration
for which the estimated variable
consideration is constrained to ensure
that it is highly probable that a significant
reversal in the amount of cumulative
revenue recognised will not occur when
the rebate amount is realised.
99
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
NOTES TO THE GROUP FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 JULY 2025
CONTINUED
2 SUMMARY OF THE GROUP’S
MATERIAL ACCOUNTING POLICIES
CONTINUED
2.6 Net finance costs
Finance income
Finance income comprises interest on
bank deposits and is recognised on a
time proportion basis using the effective
interest rate method.
Finance expense
Finance expense comprises of interest
payable and lease interest which are
expensed in the period in which they are
incurred.
2.7 Current and deferred taxation
The tax expense for the period comprises
current and deferred tax. The current
income tax charge is calculated on the
basis of tax rates and laws that have
been enacted or substantively enacted
by the reporting date in the UK and US,
where the Group operates and generates
taxable income and expenses.
Deferred tax balances are recognised in
respect of all temporary differences that
have originated but not reversed by the
reporting date, except:
the recognition of deferred tax assets is
limited to the extent that it is probable
that they will be recovered against the
reversal of deferred tax liabilities or
other future taxable profits;
any deferred tax balances are reversed
if and when all conditions for retaining
associated tax allowances have been
met; and
where timing differences relate to
interests in subsidiaries, the Group can
control their reversal and such reversal
is not considered probable in the
foreseeable future.
Deferred income tax is determined
using tax rates and laws that have
been enacted or substantively enacted
by the reporting date. Deferred tax is
charged or credited to the statement
of comprehensive income, except when
it relates to items charged or credited
directly to equity, in which case the
deferred tax is also dealt with in equity.
Where applicable, the Group claims
R&D tax reliefs in the UK in accordance
with schemes set out by HM Revenue
and Customs. Projects are assessed by
management to ensure the claims made
fit the criteria and definitions set out by
HM Revenue and Customs.
2.8 Foreign currency translation
Transactions in foreign currencies are
recorded at the rate ruling at the date
of the transaction. Monetary assets
and liabilities denominated in foreign
currencies are retranslated at the rate
of exchange ruling at the end of the
reporting period. All differences are
taken to the consolidated statement
of comprehensive income.
Details of how the Group accounts
for subsidiaries operating in foreign
currencies on consolidation is given
in note 2.4.
2.9 Inventories
Inventories are stated at the lower
of cost and net realisable value. Cost
comprises direct materials and, where
applicable, direct labour costs and an
allocation of those overheads that have
been incurred in bringing the inventories
to their present location and condition.
Cost is calculated on a weighted average
cost basis. Net realisable value is the
amount that can be realised from the
sale of the inventory in the normal
course of business after allowing for the
costs of realisation. Provision is made for
obsolete, slow‑moving or defective items
where appropriate.
2.10 Property, plant and equipment
All property, plant and equipment is
stated at historical cost less accumulated
depreciation. Historical cost includes
expenditure that is directly related to
the acquisition of the items. Depreciation
is charged to allocate the cost of
assets less their residual value over
their estimated useful lives, using the
straight‑line method. Depreciation is
provided on the following basis:
Plant and machinery 20%
straight line
Fixtures and fittings 33%
straight line
Motor vehicles 20%
straight line
Computer equipment 33%
straight line
At each reporting period end date, the
Group reviews the carrying amounts of
its tangible assets to determine whether
there is any indication that those assets
have suffered an impairment loss. There
have been no impairment indications;
however, if any such indication exists,
the recoverable amount of the asset
is estimated in order to determine the
extent of the impairment loss.
Gains and losses on disposals
are determined by comparing the
proceeds with the carrying amount
and are recognised in the statement
of comprehensive income.
Assets under construction are
not depreciated until they are put
into use. All other repairs and
maintenance expenditure is charged
to the consolidated statement of
comprehensive income during the
financial period in which it is incurred.
2.11 Exceptional and
adjusting items
Exceptional and adjusting items
are material items of income and
expense which, because of the nature
and expected infrequency of events
giving rise to them, merit separate
presentation to allow shareholders
to understand better the elements of
financial performance in the year, so
as to facilitate comparison with prior
years and to assess better trends in
financial performance. Generally, the
business is managed on a day‑to‑day
basis on adjusted EBITDA and therefore
these financial accounts provide an
explanation of what management
consider to be adjusted EBITDA and a
reconciliation to statutory measures of
profit performance.
2.12 Research and development
Research and development expenditure
that does not meet the criteria of an
intangible asset is expensed as incurred.
2.13 Cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents are basic
financial assets and comprise cash at
bank and in hand and short‑term highly
liquid deposits which are subject to an
insignificant risk of changes in value.
The Group recognises cash when it is
within its control and, in accordance with
IFRS 9, when it has the contractual right
to obtain cash from the bank.
100
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
Cash in transit between Group
companies at a period end is recognised
within the receiving company’s statement
of financial position. Cash in transit to or
from external entities at a period end is
not recognised where the Group does
not have the contractual right to obtain
the cash and is therefore not deemed to
exercise control over it.
The Group’s cash recognition policies
are aligned with IFRS 9 as follows:
in respect of incoming receipts via
electronic transfer, the Group recognises
cash as a financial asset on the transfer
settlement date, and not before. In
respect of cheques received, the Group
classifies these as ‘promissory notes’
and recognises within cash equivalents
all cheques dated and deposited with the
bank up to and including the reporting
period end. In respect of card receipts,
the Group recognises a cash equivalent
on the transaction date as they are
readily convertible to cash and the credit
risk is deemed very low.
In respect of outgoing electronic
payments, where there is often a delay
between the remittance date and the
transfer settlement date, the Group
de‑recognises the cash from financial
assets (and de‑recognises the associated
financial liability) on the transfer
remittance date, and not after, when the
following conditions exist:
there is no practical ability to withdraw,
stop or cancel the payment instruction;
there is no practical ability to access
the cash to be used for settlement as a
result of the payment instruction; and
the settlement risk associated with
the electronic payment system is
insignificant.
2.14 Financial assets
The Group classifies its financial
assets at amortised cost. Management
determines the classification of its
financial assets at initial recognition.
The Group’s financial assets held
at amortised cost comprise trade
and other receivables and cash and
cash equivalents in the consolidated
statement of financial position.
These assets are non‑derivative financial
assets with fixed or determinable
payments that are not quoted in an
active market.
They arise principally through the
provision of goods and services to
customers (e.g. trade receivables),
but also incorporate other types of
financial assets where the objective
is to hold their assets in order to
collect contractual cash flows and
the contractual cash flows are solely
payments of the principal and interest.
They are initially recognised at fair value
plus transaction costs that are directly
attributable to their acquisition or issue
and are subsequently carried at amortised
cost using the effective interest rate
method, less provision for impairment.
2.15 Financial liabilities
The Group measures its financial
liabilities at amortised cost. All financial
liabilities are recognised in the statement
of financial position when the Group
becomes a party to the contractual
provision of the instrument.
The Group’s financial liabilities held at
amortised cost comprise trade and other
payables and other short‑dated monetary
liabilities in the consolidated statement
of financial position. Trade payables and
other short‑dated monetary liabilities
are initially recognised at fair value and
subsequently carried at amortised cost
using the effective interest rate method.
Unless otherwise indicated, the carrying
values of the Group’s financial liabilities
measured at amortised cost represents
a reasonable approximation of their fair
values.
2.16 Impairment of assets
Carrying values of assets that are subject
to depreciation or amortisation are
periodically reviewed for any indicators
of impairment.
If an impairment indicator is identified,
the carrying value of the asset (or
cash‑generating units to which the
asset has been allocated) is tested
for impairment. An impairment loss
is recognised for the amount by which
the asset’s carrying amount exceeds
its recoverable amount.
The recoverable amount is the higher
of an asset’s fair value less costs to sell
and value in use. Non‑financial assets
that have been previously impaired
are reviewed at each reporting date to
assess whether there is any indication
that the impairment losses recognised in
prior periods may no longer exist or may
have decreased.
Impairment provisions for trade
receivables are recognised based on
the simplified approach within IFRS 9
using the lifetime expected credit losses.
During this process the probability of the
non‑payment of the trade receivables
is assessed. This probability is then
multiplied by the amount of the expected
loss arising from default to determine
the lifetime expected credit loss for the
trade receivables.
2.17 Equity instruments
Equity is the residual interest in the
assets of the Company after deducting
all liabilities and comprises the following:
‘share capital’ represents the nominal
value of equity shares;
‘share‑based payment reserve’
represents the cumulative fair value
of options charged to the statement of
profit or loss;
‘foreign exchange reserve’ represents
the cumulative value of foreign
currency translation differences; and
‘retained earnings’ represents retained
earnings less retained losses net of
dividends and other adjustments.
2.18 Employee benefits
The costs of short‑term employee
benefits are recognised as a liability
and an expense unless those costs are
required to be recognised as part of the
cost of inventory or fixed assets. The
cost of any unused holiday entitlement
is recognised in the period in which
the employee’s services are received.
Termination benefits are recognised
immediately as an expense when the
Group is demonstrably committed
to terminate the employment of an
employee or to provide termination
benefits.
2.19 Retirement benefit plans
The Group operates a defined
contribution pension scheme.
Contributions to the scheme are charged
to the statement of profit or loss and
other comprehensive income in the
period to which the contributions relate.
The assets of the scheme are held
separately from those of the Group.
101
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
2 SUMMARY OF THE GROUP’S
MATERIAL ACCOUNTING POLICIES
CONTINUED
2.20 Provisions
Provisions are recognised when the
Group has a present or legal constructive
obligation as a result of past events, it is
probable that an outflow of resources will
be required to settle the obligation and
the amount can be reliably estimated.
Provisions are recorded for the estimated
ultimate liability that is expected to arise,
taking into account the time value of money.
A provision against lease dilapidations
has been made based on senior
management’s assessment of likely costs
after assessing historical expenditure.
The amount recognised as a provision
is the best estimate of the consideration
required to settle the present obligation
at the reporting end date, taking into
account the risks and uncertainties
surrounding the obligation.
Where the effect of the time value of
money is material, the amount expected
to be required to settle the obligation
is recognised at present value. When
a provision is measured at present
value, the unwinding of the discount is
recognised as a finance cost in profit or
loss in the period in which it arises.
2.21 Leased assets
At inception of a contract, the Group
assesses whether a contract is, or
contains, a lease. A contract is, or
contains, a lease if the contract conveys
the right to control the use of an
identified asset for a period of time in
exchange for consideration.
To assess whether a contract conveys
the right to control the use of an
identified asset, the Group assesses
whether: an identified physically distinct
asset can be identified; and the Group
has the right to obtain substantially all
of the economic benefits from the asset
throughout the period of use and has the
ability to direct the use of the asset over
the lease term being able to restrict the
usage of third parties as applicable.
All leases are accounted for by
recognising a right‑of‑use asset and a
lease liability except for:
leases of low‑value assets; and
leases with a duration of twelve months
or less.
Lease liabilities are measured at
the present value of the contractual
payments due to the lessor over the
lease term, with the discount rate
determined by reference to the rate
inherent in the lease unless (as is
typically the case) this is not readily
determinable, in which case the
Group’s incremental borrowing rate on
commencement of the lease is used.
On initial recognition, the carrying value
of the lease liability also includes:
amounts expected to be payable under
any residual value guarantee;
the exercise price of any purchase
option granted in favour of the Group if
it is reasonably certain to access that
option; and
any penalties payable for terminating
the lease, if the term of the lease has
been estimated on the basis of the
termination option being exercised.
Right‑of‑use assets are initially
measured at the amount of the lease
liability, reduced for any lease incentives
received, and increased for:
lease payments made at or before
commencement of the lease;
initial direct costs incurred; and
the amount of any provision recognised
where the Group is contractually
required to dismantle, remove or
restore the leased asset.
Subsequent to initial measurement lease
liabilities increase as a result of interest
charged at a constant rate on the balance
outstanding and are reduced for lease
payments made. Right‑of‑use assets are
amortised on a straight‑line basis over
the remaining term of the lease or over
the remaining economic life of the asset
if, rarely, this is judged to be shorter than
the lease term. When the Group revises
its estimate of the term of any lease
(because, for example, it re‑assesses
the probability of a lessee extension
or termination option being exercised),
it adjusts the carrying amount of the
lease liability to reflect the payments
to make over the revised term, which
are discounted at the revised discount
rate applicable at the date of estimation.
An equivalent adjustment is made to the
carrying value of the right‑of‑use asset,
with the revised carrying amount being
amortised over the remaining (revised)
lease term.
Where the Group’s property leases
contain variable payment terms,
payments determined as variable are
treated as a charge to the consolidated
statement of comprehensive income and
not capitalised. Variable lease payments
are only included in the measurement
of the lease liability if they depend
on an index or rate. In such cases,
the initial measurement of the lease
liability assumes the variable element
will remain unchanged throughout the
lease term.
2.22 Share‑based payments
Details of the share‑based payment
schemes the Group operated in the year
can be found in note 22 of the Group
financial statements.
The fair value of employee services
received in exchange for the grant
of share awards is recognised as an
expense. Equity‑settled share‑based
payments are measured at fair value
at the date of grant and expensed on
a straight‑line basis over the vesting
period, based on the Group’s calculation
of the value of shares that will vest.
Cash‑settled share‑based payments
are measured at fair value at each
reporting period end and expensed on
a straight‑line basis over the vesting
period. The fair value of the cash‑settled
share‑based payments is measured
using a Probability‑Weighted Expected
Return Method (PWERM) model.
Employer social security contributions
payable in connection with the grant of
share awards are considered an integral
part of the grant itself and the charge is
treated as a cash‑settled transaction.
2.23 Segmental reporting
Operating segments are reported in
a manner consistent with the internal
reporting provided to the Chief Operating
Decision Maker (CODM). The CODM, who
is responsible for allocating resources
and assessing performance of the
operating segments, has been identified
as the Board of Directors of the Group.
The CODM has determined that there
is one single operating segment, the
manufacture and sale of sports nutrition
products.
NOTES TO THE GROUP FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 JULY 2025
CONTINUED
102
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
3 CRITICAL ACCOUNTING
ESTIMATES AND JUDGEMENTS
The preparation of the financial
information in compliance with IFRS
requires the use of certain critical
accounting estimates. It also requires
the Group management to exercise
judgement and use assumptions in
applying the Group’s accounting policies.
The resulting accounting estimates
calculated using these judgements and
assumptions may, by definition, not equal
the related actual results but are based
on historical experience and expectations
of future events. Management believe
that the estimates utilised in preparing
the financial information are reasonable
and prudent.
Estimates and judgements are
continually evaluated based on historical
experience and other factors, including
expectations of future events that are
believed to be reasonable under the
circumstances. In the future, actual
experience may differ from these
estimates and assumptions.
The judgements and key sources
of estimation uncertainty that have
a significant effect on the amounts
recognised in the financial information
are discussed below:
Share‑based payments
In order to calculate the value of
employee share options as required
by IFRS 2, the Group makes estimates
principally relating to the assumptions
used in its option‑pricing model. This is
a key estimate used to value the share
options in issue both at grant date and
at the balance sheet date.
Deferred tax assets
Deferred tax assets are recognised if
sufficient taxable income is likely to
be available in the future based on
management estimates and judgements.
Among other factors, the forecast results
from operating activities are taken into
account and the Group assesses the
recoverability of deferred tax assets at
each balance sheet date. Since future
business developments are uncertain
and partly beyond the Group’s control,
assumptions are required to estimate
future taxable income and the timing of
the realisation of deferred tax assets.
Estimates are adjusted in the period in
which there are sufficient indications for
an adjustment.
Discount rates
IFRS 16 states that the lease payments
shall be discounted using the lessee’s
incremental borrowing rate where the
rate implicit in the lease cannot be
readily determined. Accordingly, all
lease payments have been discounted
using the incremental borrowing rate
(IBR). The IBR has been determined
by management using a range of data
including current economic and market
conditions, review of current debt and
capital within the Group, lease length and
comparisons against seasoned corporate
bond rates and other relevant data
points.
The Group makes judgements to
estimate the IBR used to measure lease
liabilities based on expected third‑party
financing costs when the interest
rate implicit in the lease cannot be
readily determined. The IBR has been
determined by management using a
range of data including current economic
and market conditions, review of current
debt and capital within the Group, lease
length and comparisons against other
relevant data points. Significant changes
in IBR would cause changes to both
the value of the right‑of‑use assets and
corresponding lease liabilities. Sensitivity
analysis on the IBR, along with lease
liabilities, are detailed in note 14.
Carrying value of trade receivables
The Group holds material trade
receivable balances and the calculations
of provisions for impairment are
estimates of future events and therefore
uncertain. IFRS 9 requires the Group to
consider forward‑looking information
and the probability of default when
calculating expected credit losses.
The Group considers reasonable and
supportable customer‑specific and
market information about past events,
current conditions and forecasts of future
economic conditions when measuring
expected credit losses.
The key areas of judgement are below:
Allocation of licensing, selling and
marketing costs
The Group allocates licensing, selling
and marketing costs to administrative
expenses rather than cost of sales, as
these are not costs directly associated
with fulfilling performance obligations
under IFRS 15. This is a key area
of judgement in the presentation of
costs in the consolidated statement
of comprehensive income. If this was
changed, the cost of sales figure would
be higher and overheads costs would be
lower (although the impact would not
be material), and there would be no net
impact on the profit of the Group.
4 REVENUE
All Group revenue was generated from
the sale of goods and recognised at a
point of time, being when control has
passed to the customer. Management
considers that revenue derives from one
business stream, being the manufacture,
wholesale and retail of sports nutrition,
health and wellness products.
Volume‑based rebates are estimated
at each period end based on variable
consideration and recognised within
revenue. The Group anticipates all
rebates recognised will be payable
at the end of each financial year.
103
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
4 REVENUE CONTINUED
Revenue by geography
2025 2024
£m £m
United Kingdom
48.4
33.6
Europe
15.6
10.7
Rest of the World
43.1
41.9
107.1
86.2
Within the Group’s single business stream, revenue can be disaggregated across six product categories for the purpose
of alignment with the Directors’ internal reporting, being: protein, pre‑workout, grab‑and‑go, health and wellness, weight
management, and intra‑workout. An additional category is presented, being ‘other’, which includes sales of raw materials, white
label packaging and rebates where certain amounts are shown separately as they are unable to be allocated against specific
product ranges.
Revenue by product offering
2025 2024
£m £m
Protein
32.0
26.1
Pre‑workout
18.6
19.6
Grab‑and‑go
18.7
12.8
Health and wellness
18.2
9.7
Weight management
5.8
7.4
Intra‑workout
13.2
10.4
Other
0.6
0.2
107.1
86.2
The following table provides information about contract liabilities with customers. There were no contract assets as at
31 July 2025 and 31 July 2024.
2025 2024
£m £m
Deferred income
0.2
0.1
0.2
0.1
Revenue recognised in the year that was deferred from the previous year was £0.1 million in year ended 31 July 2025
(31 July 2024: £0.1 million). The contract liabilities relate to the deferred income in respect of the wholesale and retail of
sports nutritional, health and wellness products. Revenue is being recognised on the transfer of control to the customer.
The Group has taken the practical expedient under IFRS 15 to not disclose further details in respect of remaining revenue
performance obligations at each period end presented in the financial information, as all obligations are fulfilled within one year
or less.
NOTES TO THE GROUP FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 JULY 2025
CONTINUED
104
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
5 SEGMENTAL REPORTING
The Chief Operating Decision Maker (CODM) has been identified as the Board of Directors. The CODM reviews the Group’s internal
reporting in order to assess performance and allocate resources. The CODM has determined that there is one single operating
segment, the manufacture and sale of sports nutrition products.
Revenue by geography and products is set out in note 4, as required under entity‑wide disclosures when there is one single
operating segment. Assets held by the Company’s foreign subsidiary AN USA Holdings Inc. are immaterial to be disclosed
separately.
6 PROFIT BEFORE TAXATION
Profit before taxation is stated after charging:
2025 2024
£m £m
Depreciation of owned property, plant and equipment
0.8
0.6
Depreciation of right‑of‑use assets
0.3
0.3
In reporting financial information, the Group presents alternative performance measures (APMs), which are not defined or
specified under the requirements of IFRS. The Group believes that these APMs, which are not considered to be a substitute for
or superior to IFRS measures, provide depth and understanding to the users of the financial statements to allow for further
assessment of the underlying performance of the Group.
The Board considers that adjusted EBITDA is the most appropriate profit measure by which users of the financial statements
can assess the ongoing performance of the Group. EBITDA is a commonly used measure in which earnings are stated before net
finance income, amortisation and depreciation. The Group makes further adjustments to remove items that are exceptional or are
not reflective of the underlying operational performance either due to their nature or level of volatility.
Adjusting items and reconciliation of operating profit (an IFRS measure) to adjusted EBITDA:
2025 2024
£m £m
Operating profit
28.1
23.7
Adjusting items:
Costs relating to Initial Public Offering
1.7
1.2
Share‑based payment expense
0.2
Adjusted operating profit
29.8
25.1
Depreciation and amortisation
1.1
0.9
Adjusted EBITDA
30.9
26.0
As a result of its admission to the London Stock Exchange, the Group incurred a total of £2.9 million of costs associated with
the Initial Public Offering, of which £1.2 million were recognised in the year ended 31 July 2024 and the remainder, £1.7 million,
in the year ended 31 July 2025. These costs are considered exceptional in nature as a result of relating to a one‑off transaction.
In accordance with IFRS 2, a share‑based payment expense of £nil was recognised in the year ended 31 July 2025
(2024: £0.2 million) in respect of a Director Share Option Plan created in FY21. There is not expected to be further costs in
relation to this scheme.
All adjusting items were recognised within administrative expenses.
Services provided by the Company’s auditors
During the year, the Group obtained the following services from the Company’s auditors:
2025 2024
£m £m
Fees payable to the Company’s auditors for the audit of the Company and
consolidated financial statements
0.3
0.1
Fees payable to the Company’s auditors for other services:
– IPO‑related services
0.6
Total auditors’ remuneration
0.3
0.7
105
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
7 STAFF COSTS
The average monthly number of persons (including Directors) employed by the Group during the year was:
2025 2024
No. No.
Directors
6
4
Warehouse/production
150
147
Office
51
44
207
195
Staff costs (including Directors) are outlined below.
2025 2024
£m £m
Wages and salaries
9.7
7.8
Social security contributions and similar taxes
0.9
0.8
Share‑based payment expense (note 22)
0.2
Other pension costs
0.2
0.1
10.8
8.9
8 DIRECTOR REMUNERATION
Director remuneration comprised:
2025 2024
£m £m
Wages and salaries
0.8
0.6
Gains on exercise of share options
2.8
3.6
0.6
There were two Directors participating in money purchase pension schemes as at the year ended 31 July 2025 (2024: two).
Key management personnel include all of the Directors, who together have authority and responsibility for planning, directing and
controlling the activities of the Group’s business. There are no key management personnel other than the Directors of the Group.
Directors’ remuneration is also set out in the Directors’ remuneration report on pages 66 to 81.
9 FINANCE INCOME AND EXPENSE
2025 2024
£m £m
Finance income
Interest receivable
0.5
0.7
0.5
0.7
Finance expense
Interest on lease liabilities and dilapidations
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
NOTES TO THE GROUP FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 JULY 2025
CONTINUED
106
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
10 TAXATION
Analysis of charge in year
2025 2024
£m £m
Total current tax
8.0
6.4
Adjustments in respect of prior periods
0.1
(0.2)
Total current tax
8.1
6.2
Deferred tax credit
Origination and reversal of timing differences
(0.6)
(0.3)
Adjustment in respect of prior periods
(0.1)
(0.3)
Total deferred tax
(0.7)
(0.6)
Tax charge per statement of comprehensive income
7.4
5.6
Deferred tax charge/(credit) on share‑based payments
0.4
(0.4)
Tax charge/(credit) per statement of other comprehensive income
0.4
(0.4)
Tax credit on share‑based payments
(0.6)
Tax credit recognised directly in equity
(0.6)
The tax charges for the years presented differ from the standard rate of corporation tax in the UK. The differences are
explained below:
2025 2024
£m £m
Profit on ordinary activities before tax
28.5
24.3
Tax using the Group’s domestic tax rates
7.1
6.1
Effects of:
Expenses not deductible for tax purposes
0.3
0.3
Movement on unrecognised deferred tax
(0.1)
R&D tax claim
0.1
(0.3)
Effect of tax rates in foreign jurisdictions
0.1
Adjustments in respect of prior periods to current tax
0.1
(0.2)
Adjustments in respect of prior periods to deferred tax
(0.1)
(0.2)
Income not taxable
(0.1)
Other differences
(0.1)
Total tax charge
7.4
5.6
The applicable standard rate of corporation tax in the UK in the year ended 31 July 2025 was 25% (2024: 25%). The tax charge in
the current year is higher than (2024: lower than) the standard tax charge.
Deferred taxation assets and liabilities
Deferred taxation is calculated in full using a tax rate of 25% (2024: 25%). The following are the principal categories of deferred
taxation assets and liabilities recognised by the Group and the movements thereon during the current and prior year.
2025 2024
£m £m
Opening balance
0.6
(0.3)
Adjustments in respect of prior periods
0.1
Credited to the income statement
0.6
0.5
(Charged)/credited in other comprehensive income
(0.4)
0.4
0.9
0.6
107
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
10 TAXATION CONTINUED
Deferred taxation assets and liabilities continued
2025 2024
£m £m
Accelerated capital allowances
(0.3)
(0.4)
Share‑based payment timing differences (note 22)
0.5
Tax losses
1.0
0.5
Other differences
0.2
0.9
0.6
The net position of £0.9 million (2024: £0.6 million) is reflected in the statement of financial position as:
2025 2024
£m £m
Deferred tax assets
1.2
0.6
Deferred tax liabilities
(0.3)
0.9
0.6
As permitted by IAS 12, deferred taxation assets and liabilities are offset when there is a legally enforceable right to offset current
taxation assets against current taxation liabilities and when the deferred taxes relate to the same fiscal authority. The deferred
taxation assets disclosed above are deemed to be recoverable.
The majority of the deferred taxation balance is expected to reverse after more than twelve months.
11 EARNINGS PER SHARE
Basic and diluted
2025
2024
Earnings
Earnings for the purposes of basic and diluted earnings per share, being profit
for the year attributable to equity shareholders (£m)
21.1
18.7
Number of shares
Weighted average number of shares (No. of shares)
1
250,000,000
250,000,000
Basic and diluted earnings per share (pence)
8.4
7.5
1. As a result of the sub‑division and re‑designation of ordinary shares which took place on 23 October 2024, immediately prior to the Company’s admission to the Main Market
of the London Stock Exchange, the basic and diluted earnings per share have been calculated based on a total of 250 million ordinary shares.
The calculation of adjusted basic and diluted EPS is based on the following:
2025
2024
Profit for the period (£m)
21.1
18.7
Adjusted for:
Costs relating to Initial Public Offering (£m)
1.7
1.2
Share‑based payment expense (£m)
0.2
Tax effect of the above (£m)
(0.2)
(0.1)
Adjusted earnings (£m)
22.6
20.0
Adjusted basic and diluted earnings per share (pence)
9.1
8.0
12 DIVIDENDS
2025 2024
£m £m
Dividend declared before admission to the Main Market of the London Stock Exchange
14.7
14.7
There is no final dividend for the year ended 31 July 2025 (2024: £nil).
NOTES TO THE GROUP FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 JULY 2025
CONTINUED
108
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
13 PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
Plant and Fixtures and Motor Computer
machinery fittings vehicles equipment Total
£m £m £m £m £m
Cost
At 1 August 2023
1.2
0.7
0.1
0.2
2.2
Additions
0.8
0.2
1.0
At 31 July 2024
2.0
0.9
0.1
0.2
3.2
Depreciation
At 1 August 2023
0.6
0.3
0.9
Charge for the year
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.6
At 31 July 2024
0.9
0.5
0.1
1.5
Net book amount
At 31 July 2024
1.1
0.4
0.1
0.1
1.7
Cost
At 1 August 2024
2.0
0.9
0.1
0.2
3.2
Additions
0.8
0.1
0.1
1.0
FX differences
(0.1)
(0.1)
At 31 July 2025
2.7
1.0
0.1
0.3
4.1
Depreciation
At 1 August 2024
0.9
0.5
0.1
1.5
Charge for the year
0.4
0.2
0.1
0.1
0.8
FX differences
(0.1)
(0.1)
(0.2)
At 31 July 2025
1.2
0.6
0.1
0.2
2.1
Net book amount
At 31 July 2025
1.5
0.4
0.1
2.0
Depreciation charges are recognised in administrative expenses in the consolidated statement of comprehensive income.
109
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
14 LEASED ASSETS
2025
2024
Number of active leases
3
3
The Group’s leases include leasehold properties for commercial and head office use.
Extension, termination and break options
The Group sometimes negotiates extension, termination or break clauses in its leases. In determining the lease term,
management consider all facts and circumstances that create an economic incentive to exercise an extension option, or not
exercise a termination option. Extension options (or periods after termination options) are only included in the lease term if the
lease is reasonably certain to be extended (or not terminated).
On a case‑by‑case basis, the Group will consider whether the absence of a break clause would expose the Group to excessive risk.
Typically, factors considered in deciding to negotiate a break clause include:
the length of the lease term;
the economic stability of the environment in which the property is located; and
whether the location represents a new area of operations for the Group.
Incremental borrowing rate
The Group has adopted a rate with a range of 3.25% to 5.00% as its incremental borrowing rate (IBR), being the rate that the
individual lessee would have to pay to borrow the funds necessary to obtain an asset of similar value to the right‑of‑use asset in
a similar economic environment with similar terms, security and conditions. This rate is used to reflect the risk premium over the
borrowing cost of the Group measured by reference to the Group’s facilities.
Sensitivity analysis has been performed that shows that the effect of a 1% decrease in the IBR used will cause an increase in
lease liabilities of below £0.1 million as at 31 July 2025 (2024: £0.1 million) and an increase in right‑of‑use assets of £0.1 million
(2024: £0.1 million). An increase of 1% in the IBR used will cause a decrease in lease liabilities of below £0.1 million as at
31 July 2025 (2024: same) and a decrease in right‑of‑use assets of £0.1 million (2024: £0.1 million).
Right‑of‑use assets
Leasehold
property Total
£m £m
Cost
At 1 August 2023
2.5
2.5
At 31 July 2024
2.5
2.5
Depreciation
At 1 August 2023
0.4
0.4
Charge for the period
0.3
0.3
At 31 July 2024
0.7
0.7
Net book amount
At 31 July 2024
1.8
1.8
Cost
At 1 August 2024
2.5
2.5
Addition – rent modification
1.5
1.5
At 31 July 2025
4.0
4.0
Depreciation
At 1 August 2024
0.7
0.7
Charge for the period
0.3
0.3
At 31 July 2025
1.0
1.0
Net book amount
At 31 July 2025
3.0
3.0
Depreciation charges are recognised in administrative expenses in the consolidated statement of comprehensive income.
NOTES TO THE GROUP FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 JULY 2025
CONTINUED
110
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
Lease liabilities
Leasehold
property Total
£m £m
At 1 August 2023
2.1
2.1
Lease payments
(0.3)
(0.3)
At 31 July 2024
1.8
1.8
At 1 August 2024
1.8
1.8
Addition – rent modification
1.5
1.5
Interest expense
0.1
0.1
Lease payments
(0.4)
(0.4)
At 31 July 2025
3.0
3.0
The Group recognises non‑current provisions for dilapidations in respect of leased properties, details of which are shown in note
20. Movement on the provisions for dilapidations has been recognised in the consolidated statement of comprehensive income.
Lease liabilities are as follows:
2025 2024
£m £m
Within one year
0.7
0.4
Later than one year and less than five years
2.6
1.3
After five years
0.3
Total including interest cash flows
3.3
2.0
Less: interest cash flows
(0.3)
(0.2)
Total principal cash flows
3.0
1.8
Lease liabilities are comprised of the following current and non‑current amounts:
2025 2024
£m £m
Current
Amounts due within one year
0.6
0.3
Non‑current
Amounts due after more than one year
2.4
1.5
Total lease liability
3.0
1.8
111
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
15 INTANGIBLE ASSETS
All values (cost, amortisation and net book) relating to intangible assets for the current and prior reporting year were below
£0.1 million.
Addition of costs relating to intangible assets during 2025 was below £0.1 million, but taken together with the brought‑forward
costs of intangible assets as at 1 August 2024, the closing cost of intangible assets was £0.1 million.
Amortisation as at 1 August 2024 and charged during 2025 totals less than £0.1 million.
All intangible assets during the current and prior periods related to patents and licences.
16 INVENTORIES
2025 2024
£m £m
Raw materials
12.8
10.7
Finished goods and goods for resale
10.0
8.8
22.8
19.5
The cost of Group inventories recognised as an expense in year to 31 July 2025 amounted to £51.4 million (2024: £40.7 million).
This is included in cost of sales. Inventory write‑offs and inventory provisions netted from gross inventory were £0.4 million for
the year to 31 July 2025 (2024: £0.9 million).
NOTES TO THE GROUP FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 JULY 2025
CONTINUED
112
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
17 TRADE AND OTHER RECEIVABLES
2025 2024
£m £m
Amounts falling due within one year:
Trade receivables
26.4
17.1
Less: provision for impairment
(0.7)
(0.8)
Trade receivables – net
25.7
16.3
Corporation tax
0.5
Prepayments
1.7
0.5
27.4
17.3
Trade receivables are amounts due from customers for goods sold in the ordinary course of business. They are generally due
for settlement within 30 to 60 days for certain credit customers and therefore are all classified as current. Trade receivables are
non‑interest bearing. The fair value of trade and other receivables is equivalent to their carrying amount.
Under IFRS 9, the Group is required to utilise objective evidence as well as consider forward‑looking information and the
probability of default when calculating expected credit losses. The maturity of assets and history of write‑offs is therefore used as
an indicator as to the probability of default. Trade receivables are written off if the customer has entered into insolvency, or in the
view of management there is no expectation of recovery.
The loss allowance as at 31 July 2025 and 31 July 2024 was determined as follows for trade receivables:
Current <30 days 31‑60 days 61+ days Total
As at 31 July 2024 £m £m £m £m £m
Expected credit loss rate
4.8%
10.3%
29.2%
4.8%
Total gross carrying amount
10.1
3.7
1.7
1.6
17.1
Expected credit loss
(0.2)
(0.2)
(0.4)
(0.8)
Total
10.1
3.5
1.5
1.2
16.3
Current <30 days 31‑60 days 61+ days Total
As at 31 July 2025 £m £m £m £m £m
Expected credit loss rate
5.8%
14.0%
12.2%
2.7%
Total gross carrying amount
19.4
2.9
1.0
3.1
26.4
Expected credit loss
(0.2)
(0.1)
(0.4)
(0.7)
Total
19.4
2.7
0.9
2.7
25.7
18 CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS
2025 2024
£m £m
Cash and cash equivalents
18.5
18.7
18.5
18.7
The fair value of cash and cash equivalents is equivalent to their carrying amount.
113
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
19 TRADE AND OTHER PAYABLES
2025 2024
£m £m
Amounts falling due within one year:
Trade payables
10.6
3.8
Corporation tax
0.5
Social security and other taxes
0.3
0.2
VAT
0.5
0.6
Deferred income
0.2
0.1
Accruals
5.0
4.8
17.1
9.5
Trade payables are non‑interest bearing and are normally settled monthly. The fair value of trade and other payables is equivalent
to their carrying amount.
20 PROVISIONS
Non‑current
Leasehold
property
dilapidations Total
£m £m
At 1 August 2023
0.2
0.2
At 31 July 2024
0.2
0.2
At 1 August 2024
0.2
0.2
Interest expense
0.1
0.1
At 31 July 2025
0.3
0.3
As part of the Group’s property leasing arrangements there is an obligation to repair damage which occurs during the life of
the lease, such as wear and tear. These costs have been shown separately to the lease obligation liability as detailed in note 14.
The provisions are expected to be utilised by 2030 as the leases terminate. The dilapidations provision is considered a source
of estimation. The provision has been calculated using historical experience of actual expenditure incurred on dilapidations and
estimated lease termination dates.
NOTES TO THE GROUP FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 JULY 2025
CONTINUED
114
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
21 SHARE CAPITAL
Allotted, called up and fully paid
2025 2024
Shares Shares
Ordinary shares of £0.0002 each
Opening number of ordinary shares
Sub‑division and re‑designation of shares
250,000,000
Closing number of ordinary shares
250,000,000
A1 ordinary shares of £0.01 each
Opening number of A1 ordinary shares
5,433
5,800
Bonus issue
2,711,067
Re‑designation of shares
(2,716,500)
(367)
Closing number of A1 ordinary shares
5,433
A2 ordinary shares of £0.01 each
Opening number of A2 ordinary shares
943
1,000
Bonus issue
470,557
Re‑designation of shares
(471,500)
(57)
Closing number of A2 ordinary shares
943
B ordinary shares of £0.01 each
Opening number of B ordinary shares
3,136
3,200
Bonus issue
1,564,864
Re‑designation of shares
(1,568,000)
(64)
Closing number of B ordinary shares
3,136
D ordinary shares of £0.01 each
Opening number of D ordinary shares
488
Bonus issue
243,512
Re‑designation of shares
(244,000)
488
Closing number of D ordinary shares
488
Closing number of shares
250,000,000
10,000
115
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
21 SHARE CAPITAL CONTINUED
Allotted, called up and fully paid continued
2025 2024
£ £
Ordinary shares of £0.0002 each
Opening value of ordinary shares
Sub‑division and re‑designation of shares
50,000.00
Closing value of ordinary shares
50,000.00
A1 ordinary shares of £0.01 each
Opening value of A1 ordinary shares
54.33
58.00
Bonus issue
27,110.67
Re‑designation of shares
(27,165.00)
(3.67)
Closing value of A1 ordinary shares
54.33
A2 ordinary shares of £0.01 each
Opening value of A2 ordinary shares
9.43
10.00
Bonus issue
4,705.57
Re‑designation of shares
(4,715.00)
(0.57)
Closing value of A2 ordinary shares
9.43
B ordinary shares of £0.01 each
Opening value of B ordinary shares
31.36
32.00
Bonus issue
15,648.64
Re‑designation of shares
(15,680.00)
(0.64)
Closing value of B ordinary shares
31.36
D ordinary shares of £0.01 each
Opening value of D ordinary shares
4.88
Bonus issue
2,435.12
Re‑designation of shares
(2,440.00)
4.88
Closing value of D ordinary shares
4.88
Closing value of share capital
50,000.00
100.00
There is a single class of ordinary shares in issue. There are no restrictions on dividends or the repayment of capital.
Shareholders are entitled to one voting right per share.
Re‑designation of shares
On 31 January 2024, 116 A1 ordinary shares, 20 A2 ordinary shares and 64 B ordinary shares were re‑designated into
200 D ordinary shares of £0.01 each.
On 18 April 2024, 171 A1 ordinary shares and 29 A2 ordinary shares were re‑designated into 200 D shares of £0.01 each.
On 6 June 2024, 42 A1 ordinary shares and 8 A2 ordinary shares were re‑designated into 50 D ordinary shares of £0.01 each.
On 7 June 2024, 38 A1 ordinary shares were re‑designated into 38 D ordinary shares of £0.01 each.
On 24 September 2024, a shareholders’ resolution was passed in respect of a bonus issue of 4,990,000 new ordinary shares.
A sum of £49,900 was capitalised from the Company’s distributable reserves and appropriated to the shareholders of the
Company in proportion to the number of ordinary shares (A1, A2, B and D) in the Company held by them respectively. As a result
of the bonus issue, the total number of ordinary shares in issue increased to 5,000,000 and the resultant share capital increased
to £50,000. This transaction was required to facilitate the Company’s re‑registration as a PLC.
On 23 October 2024, immediately prior to the Company’s admission to the Main Market of the London Stock Exchange, each of the
2,716,500 A1 ordinary shares of £0.01 each, 471,500 A2 ordinary shares of £0.01 each, 1,568,000 B ordinary shares of £0.01 each
and 244,000 D ordinary shares of £0.01 each in the capital of the Company were sub‑divided and re‑designated as 250,000,000
ordinary shares of £0.0002 each in the capital of the Company.
NOTES TO THE GROUP FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 JULY 2025
CONTINUED
116
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
22 SHARE-BASED PAYMENTS
In the year ended 31 July 2025, the Group operated one equity‑settled share‑based payment plan established following the
Company’s admission to the London Stock Exchange and described below. In the year ended 31 July 2024, the Group operated one
equity‑settled share‑based payment plan, all open options of which were exercised in the year to 31 July 2025 and the scheme is
now closed. The Group recognised a total charge of £0.2 million in respect of the equity‑settled share‑based payment transactions
in the year ended 31 July 2024. As a result of the exercise and closing of the scheme, there are no outstanding share options at
31 July 2025.
In the year ended 31 July 2025, the Group operated one cash‑settled share‑based payment plan (2024: one).
The Group recognised a total charge of £nil in respect of the cash‑settled share‑based payment transactions in the year ended
31 July 2025 (2024: £nil). The fair value of the cash‑settled share‑based payments is measured using a Probability‑Weighted
Expected Return Method (PWERM) model which resulted in an outcome that was deemed not material. As at 31 July 2025,
AN USA Holdings Inc.’s CEO owned 10% of the shares in issue of AN USA Holdings Inc. as the shares held no rights to vote,
or receive dividends, and could only be bought back by AN USA Holdings Inc. at a predetermined formulaic price and is therefore
treated as a cash‑settled share‑based payment scheme.
Long‑term Incentive Plan (LTIP)
In the year ended 31 July 2025, the Group established an equity‑settled LTIP which forms a key component of the overall
remuneration package for Executive Directors, further details of which can be found in the Directors’ Remuneration Report.
The scheme will apply from the year ending 31 July 2026 and therefore in the year to 31 July 2025, no share awards were
made and the Group recognised a total charge of £nil in respect of the LTIP’s equity‑settled share‑based payment transactions
(2024: £nil).
117
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
23 FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS
Financial assets
The Group’s financial instruments comprise cash and cash equivalents, lease liabilities and items such as trade and other
receivables and trade and other payables, which arise from its operations. The carrying amounts of all of the Group’s financial
instruments are measured at amortised cost. Financial assets do not include prepayments. Financial liabilities do not include
deferred income and other taxation and social security.
2025 2024
£m £m
Trade receivables
25.7
16.3
Cash and cash equivalents
18.5
18.7
44.2
35.0
Financial liabilities
Financial liabilities measured at amortised cost comprise trade payables, other payables, and accruals. It does not include
deferred income and other taxation and social security.
2025 2024
£m £m
Trade payables
10.6
3.8
Accruals
5.0
4.8
Lease liabilities
3.0
1.8
18.6
10.4
NOTES TO THE GROUP FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 JULY 2025
CONTINUED
118
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
Financial risk management
The Group is exposed through its
operation to the following financial
risks: credit risk, interest rate risk,
foreign exchange risk and liquidity
risk. Risk management is carried
out by the Directors. The Group uses
financial instruments to provide
flexibility regarding its working capital
requirements and to enable it to manage
specific financial risks to which it is
exposed.
The Group finances its operations
through cash and liquid resources and
various items such as trade debtors and
trade payables which arise directly from
the Group’s operations.
Credit risk
Credit risk is the risk of financial loss to
the Group if a customer or counterparty
to a financial instrument fails to meet
its contractual obligations. In order to
minimise the risk, the Group endeavours
only to deal with companies which are
demonstrably creditworthy and this,
together with the aggregate financial
exposure, is continuously monitored. The
Group’s review includes external ratings,
where available, and purchase limits are
established for each customer, which
represents the maximum open amount
without requiring approval from the
Group’s finance function. The maximum
exposure to credit risk is the carrying
value of its financial receivables, trade
and other receivables and cash and cash
equivalents as disclosed in the notes to
the Group financial statements.
The aged receivables analysis is
evaluated on a regular basis for potential
doubtful debts, considering historic,
current and forward‑looking information.
No impairments to trade receivables
have been made to date. Further
disclosures regarding trade and other
receivables are provided within the notes
to the Group financial statements.
Credit risk also arises on cash and cash
equivalents and deposits with banks
and financial institutions. For banks and
financial institutions, only independently
rated parties with minimum rating ‘B+’
are accepted. Currently, the financial
institution where the Group holds
significant levels of cash is The Royal
Bank of Scotland plc, which is rated
higher than B+ by all four major credit
reference agencies.
Interest and market rate risk
As at 31 July 2025, the Group had no
current borrowings and used no finance
facilities or debt structures to co‑ordinate
business. Therefore, interest and market
rate risk exposure for the Group is
minimal. The Group’s policy aims to
manage the interest cost of the Group
within the constraints of its financial
borrowings.
The Group has entered into significant
leases for assets, namely leasehold
properties, under fixed interest rate
terms. This means that the interest rate
charged on these leases is fixed for the
entire term of the lease, regardless of
changes in market interest rates.
If market interest rates rise, the Group’s
fixed‑rate leases will become less
attractive to potential lessors, as they
would be able to obtain better rates
elsewhere. On renewal of these leases,
this could result in the Group having to
renew or renegotiate these leases at
higher rates, which would increase its
operating costs and potentially reduce
its profitability.
The Group looks to mitigate this risk
by committing to lease agreements
in respect of leasehold properties in
advance of the end of lease terms,
ensuring management can manage
and plan for interest rate change.
Foreign exchange risk
Foreign exchange risk arises when
the Group enters into transactions in
a currency other than their functional
currency. The Group’s policy is, where
possible, to settle liabilities denominated
in a currency other than its functional
currency with cash already denominated
in that currency. Where Group entities
have liabilities denominated in a
currency other than their functional
currency (and have insufficient reserves
of that currency to settle them), cash
already denominated in that currency
will, where possible, be transferred from
elsewhere in the Group.
119
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
23 FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS CONTINUED
Financial risk management continued
Foreign exchange risk continued
The Group’s exposure to foreign currency risk at the end of the respective reporting period was as follows:
2025 2024
£m £m
Cash
USD
0.5
0.3
Total cash
0.5
0.3
Trade receivables
USD
0.8
0.5
Total trade receivables
0.8
0.5
Trade payables
USD
0.6
0.3
Total trade payables
0.6
0.3
The effect of a 10% strengthening and 10% weakening of the US dollar against sterling would result in the following impact to the
consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income:
2025 2024
£m £m
10% strengthening
(0.1)
(0.1)
10% weakening
0.1
0.1
Liquidity risk
Liquidity risk arises from the Group’s management of working capital and the finance charges and repayments of its financial
liabilities. It is the risk that the Group will encounter difficulty in meeting its financial obligations as they fall due. The Group seeks
to maintain sufficient cash balances and management review cash flow forecasts on a regular basis to determine whether the
Group has sufficient cash reserves to meet future working capital requirements and to take advantage of business opportunities.
A maturity analysis of the Group’s financial liabilities and lease liabilities is shown below:
2025 2024
£m £m
Less than one year:
Trade and other payables
10.6
3.8
Accruals
5.0
4.8
Lease liability
0.7
0.4
16.3
9.0
Later than one year and less than five years:
Lease liability
2.6
1.3
After five years:
Lease liability
0.3
18.9
10.6
Less: interest cash flows:
Lease liability
(0.3)
(0.2)
Total less interest cash flows
18.6
10.4
NOTES TO THE GROUP FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 JULY 2025
CONTINUED
120
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
Capital risk management
The capital structure of the business consists of cash and cash equivalents and equity. Equity comprises share capital and
retained earnings and is equal to the amount shown as ‘Equity’ in the balance sheet.
The Group’s current objectives when maintaining capital are to:
safeguard the Group’s ability as a going concern so that it can continue to pursue its growth plans;
provide a reasonable expectation of future returns to shareholders; and
maintain adequate financial flexibility to preserve its ability to meet financial obligations, both current and long term.
The Group sets the amount of capital it requires in proportion to risk. The Group manages its capital structure and adjusts it in the
light of changes in economic conditions and the risk characteristics of underlying assets. In order to maintain or adjust the capital
structure, the Group may issue new shares or sell assets.
24 INVESTMENTS IN SUBSIDIARIES
The subsidiaries of the Group, all of which have been included in these consolidated financial statements, are as follows:
Percentage of voting Proportion of ordinary shares
Subsidiary
Principal activity
Country of incorporation
rights held held by Group
AN USA Holdings Inc.
Sale of sports
United States of America
2025: 100%
2025: 90%
nutrition products
(2024:
100%)
(2024: 90%)
Applied Nutrition
Dormant
Colombia, South America 2025: 100%
2025: 100%
Colombia SAS
(2024:
100%)
(2024: 100%)
The Group holds direct investments in all subsidiaries.
On 4 June 2024, AN USA Holdings Inc.’s CEO was issued 10,000 class A shares. The shares held required employment of the
individual in years one, two and three, with a further option contained with the ability to sell one‑third of the shares per annum,
starting from the fourth year of service thereafter to AN USA Holdings Inc. at a set predetermined formulaic price (based on the
financial performance/a financial metric rather than equity value). The class A shareholders held no rights to vote, nor receive
dividends.
The A shares represent a long‑term employment benefit under IAS 19 across the service of employment. As at 31 July 2025,
the employee benefit expense accrued was £nil, as the potential liability was immaterial.
As at 31 July 2025, AN USA Holdings Inc.’s CEO owned 10% of the shares in issue of AN USA Holdings Inc.; as the shares held no
rights to vote, or receive dividends, and could only be bought back by AN USA Holdings Inc. at a predetermined formulaic price,
it is concluded the AN USA Holdings Inc.’s CEO held no rights to AN USA Holdings Inc.’s equity outside of the predetermined
formula, and thus no non‑controlling interest (NCI) existed. No recognition of NCI was recognised as at 31 July 2025, nor was
any recognised as at 31 July 2024.
25 RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS
The Group’s related parties include its subsidiary undertakings, key management personnel (comprising the Executive and
Non‑Executive Directors), their closely related family members and shareholders with significant influence. Transactions and
balances between the parent and its subsidiaries have been eliminated upon consolidation and are not disclosed.
Key management compensation
The remuneration of key management personnel, comprising the Executive and Non‑Executive Directors of the Company, is set
out below in aggregate for each of the categories specified in IAS 24 Related Party Disclosures:
2025 2024
£m £m
Short‑term employee benefits (salary and bonus)
0.9
0.6
Share‑based payment expense
0.2
0.9
0.8
Further information on remuneration of Directors can be found in the Directors’ Remuneration Report.
121
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
25 RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS CONTINUED
Dividend
The following dividends were paid to Directors of the Company during their term of office, or other related party:
2025 2024
£m £m
Thomas Ryder
7.9
Steven Granite
1.4
Blythe Investments
0.3
Scate Limited
0.1
Joe Pollard
0.1
JD Sports Fashion plc
4.6
Blythe Investments and Scate Limited are related parties by virtue of the fact they are considered to be controlled by Directors of
the Company.
Shareholders with significant influence
As a result of the Group’s IPO on 24 October 2024, JD Sports Fashion plc reduced its shareholding from 31.36% to less than 10%
of the issued shared capital of Applied Nutrition plc. As such, the entity no longer meets the definition of an associate company as
described by IAS 28 Investments in Associates and Joint Ventures. Similarly, JD Sports Fashion plc no longer meets the definition
of related party, as described by IAS 24 Related Party Disclosures.
Other related party transactions
2025 2024
£m £m
Sales (during the period of being a related party)
0.3
1.2
Amount due at period end
n/a
0.1
The above transactions were with JD Sports Gyms Limited, which was considered a related party by virtue of its ownership via JD
Sports Fashion plc. This ceased to be the case after the IPO of the Group and therefore the above disclosure relates only to the
period it was considered to be a related party.
There were no other amounts due to or from related parties as at 31 July 2025 (2024: none). The Group has not made any
allowance for bad or doubtful debts in respect of related party debtors nor has any guarantee been given or received during the
historical financial period regarding related party transactions.
26 RETIREMENT BENEFIT PLANS
The Group operates a defined contribution retirement benefit plan for all qualifying employees. The assets of the plan are held
separately from those of the Group in funds under the control of trustees. The total expense recognised in the statement of profit
or loss and other comprehensive income of £0.2 million (2024: £0.1 million) represents contributions payable to this plan by
the Group at rates specified in the rules of the plan. Amounts totalling less than £0.1 million (2024: less than £0.1 million) were
outstanding at the balance sheet date.
27 CHANGES IN LIABILITIES FROM FINANCING ACTIVITIES
Financing New borrowings Non‑cash
2023 cash flows Interest non‑cash changes 2024
£m £m £m £m £m £m
Lease liabilities
2.1
(0.3)
1.8
Total liabilities from
financing activities
2.1
(0.3)
1.8
Financing New borrowings Non‑cash
2024 cash flows Interest non‑cash changes 2025
£m £m £m £m £m £m
Lease liabilities
1.8
(0.4)
0.1
1.5
3.0
Total liabilities from
financing activities
1.8
(0.4)
0.1
1.5
3.0
28 POST BALANCE SHEET EVENTS
There have been no material post balance sheet events that would require disclosure or adjustment to these financial statements.
NOTES TO THE GROUP FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 JULY 2025
CONTINUED
122
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
Note
2025
£m
2024
£m
Non‑current assets
Intangible assets 0.1
Property, plant and equipment 3 1.9 1.7
Right‑of‑use assets 4 3.0 1.8
Deferred tax assets 5 0.1
Intercompany loans 8 8.8 5.1
13.8 8.7
Current assets
Inventories 6 20.3 18.3
Trade and other receivables 7 26.6 16.9
Cash and cash equivalents 9 18.1 18.4
65.0 53.6
Total assets 78.8 62.3
Current liabilities
Lease liabilities 11 (0.6) (0.3)
Trade and other payables 10 (16.4) (9.8)
(17.0) (10.1)
Non‑current liabilities
Deferred tax liabilities 5 (0.4)
Lease liabilities 11 (2.4) (1.5)
Provision for liabilities 12 (0.3) (0.2)
(3.1) (1.7)
Total liabilities (20.1) (11.8)
Net assets 58.7 50.5
Equity
Share capital 13 0.1
Share‑based payment reserve 0.2 0.2
Retained earnings 58.4 50.3
Total equity 58.7 50.5
The accompanying notes form an integral part of the parent company financial statements. Applied Nutrition plc is registered in
England and Wales (company number: 09131749).
As permitted by section 408 of the Companies Act 2006, the Company’s statement of profit or loss has not been included in these
financial statements.
The Company generated a profit for the year to 31 July 2025 of £22.7 million (2024: £19.4 million).
The notes on pages 125 to 133 are an integral part of these financial statements.
The financial statements on pages 123 to 133 were approved and authorised for issue by the Board of Directors on 7 November
and signed on its behalfby:
Thomas Ryder Joe Pollard
Chief Executive Officer Chief Financial Officer
PARENT COMPANY STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION
AS AT 31 JULY 2025
123
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
Share
capital
£m
Share‑based
payment
reserve
£m
Retained
earnings
£m
Total
equity
£m
As at 1 August 2023 30.5 30.5
Comprehensive income:
Profit for the year 19.4 19.4
Share‑based payments 0.4 0.4
Transactions with owners:
Share‑based payments 0.2 0.2
Balance at 31 July 2024 0.2 50.3 50.5
Comprehensive income:
Profit for the year 22.7 22.7
Other comprehensive loss (0.4) (0.4)
Transactions with owners:
Bonus share issue 0.1 (0.1)
Dividends paid (14.7) (14.7)
Tax recognised directly in equity 0.6 0.6
Balance at 31 July 2025 0.1 0.2 58.4 58.7
The accompanying notes form an integral part of the parent company financial statements.
PARENT COMPANY STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN EQUITY
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 JULY 2025
124
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
1 SUMMARY OF PARENT
COMPANY’S ACCOUNTING
POLICIES
1.1 Basis of preparation
The Company is a public limited company
registered and incorporated in England
and Wales under the Companies Act 2006
(registered company number 09131749).
The address of the Company’s registered
office is 2 Acornfield Road, Knowsley
Industrial Park, Liverpool, England,
L337UG.
The separate financial statements of
the Company have been prepared in
accordance with the Financial Reporting
Standard 101 ‘Reduced Disclosure
Framework’ (FRS 101), on the going
concern basis and under the historical
cost convention and applicable
accounting standards in the UK, and
in accordance with the Companies Act
2006. The material accounting policies,
which have been applied consistently
to all the years presented, are set out
below. These financial statements
and accompanying notes have been
prepared in accordance with the reduced
disclosure framework for all years
presented. These financial statements
are prepared in GBP. Amounts are
rounded to the nearest million, unless
otherwise stated.
The following exemptions from the
requirements of IFRS have been applied
in the preparation of these financial
statements, inaccordance with FRS 101:
the following paragraphs of IAS 1
Presentation of Financial Statements:
10(d) (statement of cash flows);
10(f) (a statement of financial position
as at the beginning of the preceding
period when an entity applies an
accounting policy retrospectively or
makes a retrospective restatement
of items in its financial statements,
or when it reclassifies items in its
financial statements);
16 (a statement of compliance with all
IFRS);
38A (requirement for minimum of two
primary statements, including cash
flow statements);
38B‑D (additional comparative
information);
40A‑D (requirement for a third
statement of financial position);
111 (cash flow statement information);
and
134‑136 (capital management
disclosures);
IFRS 7 Financial Instruments:
Disclosures;
IAS 7 Statement of Cash Flows;
IAS 24 Related Party Disclosures – the
requirement to disclose related party
transactions between two or more
members of agroup;
IAS 24 (paragraphs 17 and 18a) Related
Party Disclosures (key management
compensation);
paragraphs 91 to 99 of IFRS 13 Fair
Value Measurement (disclosure of
valuation techniques and inputs used
for fair value measurement of assets or
liabilities);
paragraph 38 of IAS 1 Presentation
of Financial Statements, comparative
information in respect of:
paragraph 79(a)(iv) of IAS 1;
paragraph 73 (e) of IAS 16 Property,
Plant and Equipment; and
paragraph 118(e) of IAS 38 Intangible
Assets (reconciliations between the
carrying amount at the beginning and
end of the period);
paragraphs 30 and 31 of IAS 8
Accounting Policies, Changes in
Accounting Estimates and Errors
(requirement for the disclosure of
information when an entity has not
applied a new IFRS that has been
issued but is not yet effective); and
paragraphs 130(f)(ii) (iii), 134(d)–(f)
and 135(c)–(e) of IAS 36 Impairment
ofAssets.
As the Group financial statements include
the equivalent disclosures, the Company
has taken the exemptions available
under FRS101 in respect of the following
disclosures:
IFRS 2 Share‑based Payments in
respect of Group equity‑settled
share‑based payments; and
certain disclosures required by IAS
12 Income Taxes, IFRS 13 Fair Value
Measurement and disclosures required
by IFRS 7 Financial Instruments:
Disclosures.
1.2 Adoption of new and revised
standards
The following standards and
interpretations apply for the first time to
financial reporting periods commencing
on or after 1January 2024, and became
effective for the parent company
financial statements for the year ended
31July2025, noneofwhich have a
material impact on the Group:
Non‑current Liabilities with Covenants
(Amendments to IAS 1);
Amendments to IAS 1 Presentation of
Financial Statements: Classification of
Liabilities as Current or Non‑current;
Amendments to IFRS 16 – Lease
Liability in Sale and Leaseback; and
Supplier Finance Arrangements
(Amendments to IAS 7 and IFRS 7).
The following standards, amendments
and interpretations are not yet effective
and have not been early adopted by the
Company:
Amendments to IAS 21 Lack of
Exchangeability;
IFRS 18 Presentation and Disclosure
inFinancial Statements;
IFRS 19 Subsidiaries without Public
Accountability: Disclosures; and
Amendments to IFRS 9 and IFRS 7
Classification and Measurement of
Financial Instruments.
Certain new standards, amendments
to standards, and interpretationshave
been issued by the IASB that are
effective in future accounting periods
that the Group has decided not to adopt
early. These standards, amendments or
interpretations are not expected to have
a material impact on the Group.
While IFRS 18 Presentation and
Disclosure in Financial Statements will
not have any effect on the recognition
and measurement of items in the
separate financial statements of the
Company, it is expected to have a
significant effect on the presentation and
disclosure of certain items. These effects
include changes to categorisation and
sub‑totals in the statement of profit or
loss, aggregation/disaggregation and
labelling of information and disclosure
of management‑defined performance
measures. The Company is currently
assessing the impact of these changes.
NOTES TO THE PARENT COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 JULY 2025
125
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
1 SUMMARY OF PARENT
COMPANY’S ACCOUNTING
POLICIES CONTINUED
1.3 Parent company income
statement
The Company has not presented its
own income statement as permitted
by section 408 of the Companies Act
2006. TheCompany’s profit for the year
was £22.7 million (2024: £19.4 million).
The profit for the year is shown in the
statement of changes in equity. There
are no material differences between the
profit for the year in the current period
and the prior year and its historical
cost equivalent. Accordingly, no note
of historical cost profits and losses
hasbeen presented.
1.4 Going concern
Details of the Company’s going concern
status are disclosed within note 2 of the
Consolidated Financial Statements.
1.5 Property, plant and equipment
All property, plant and equipment is
stated at historical cost less accumulated
depreciation. Historical cost includes
expenditure that is directly related to
the acquisition of the items. Depreciation
is charged to allocate the cost of
assets less their residual value over
their estimated useful lives, using the
straight‑line method. Depreciation is
provided on the following basis:
Plant and machinery 20%
straight line
Fixtures and fittings 33%
straight line
Motor vehicles 20%
straight line
Computer equipment 33%
straight line
At each reporting period end date, the
Company reviews the carrying amounts
of its tangible assets to determine
whether there is any indication
that those assets have suffered an
impairment loss. There have been no
impairment indications; however, if any
such indication exists, the recoverable
amountof the asset is estimated in
order to determine the extent of the
impairment loss.
Gains and losses on disposals
are determined by comparing the
proceeds with the carrying amount
and are recognised in the statement
ofcomprehensive income.
Assets under construction are not
depreciated until they are put into use.
All other repairs and maintenance
expenditure is charged to the income
statement during the financial period
inwhich it is incurred.
1.6 Foreign currency translation
Transactions in foreign currencies are
recorded at the exchange rate ruling at
the date of the transaction. Monetary
assets and liabilities denominated in
foreign currencies are retranslated at
the rate of exchange ruling at the end of
the reporting period. All differences are
taken to the statement of profit or loss
and other comprehensive income.
1.7 Intercompany loans
Intercompany loans are initially
recognised at fair value plus transaction
costs that are directly attributable to
the acquisition of the financial asset.
They are subsequently measured at
amortised cost using the effective
interest rate method, less any provision
for impairment. IFRS 9 requires the
Company to consider forward‑looking
information and the probability of default
when calculating expected credit losses
on intercompany loans. The Company
considers reasonable and supportable
forecasts and market information about
past events, current conditions and
forecasts of future economic conditions
when measuring expected credit losses.
2 REMUNERATION OF DIRECTORS
AND AUDITORS
Details of the Directors’ remuneration are
shown in the Directors’ Remuneration
Report on pages 66 to 81. Details of
auditors’ remuneration are shown in
note8 of the Group financial statements.
NOTES TO THE PARENT COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 JULY 2025
CONTINUED
126
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
3 PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
Plant and
machinery
£m
Fixtures and
fittings
£m
Motor
vehicles
£m
Computer
equipment
£m
Total
£m
Cost
At 1 August 2023 1.2 0.7 0.1 0.2 2.2
Additions 0.8 0.2 1.0
At 31 July 2024 2.0 0.9 0.1 0.2 3.2
Additions 0.8 0.1 0.9
At 31 July 2025 2.8 0.9 0.1 0.3 4.1
Accumulated depreciation
At 1 August 2023 0.6 0.3 0.1 1.0
Charge for the year 0.3 0.2 0.5
At 31 July 2024 0.9 0.5 0.1 1.5
Charge for the year 0.4 0.2 0.1 0.7
At 31 July 2025 1.3 0.7 0.2 2.2
Carrying amount
At 31 July 2025 1.5 0.2 0.1 0.1 1.9
At 31 July 2024 1.1 0.4 0.1 0.1 1.7
4 RIGHT-OF-USE ASSETS
Leasehold
property
£m
Total
£m
Cost
At 31 July 2024 2.4 2.4
Additions 1.5 1.5
At 31 July 2025 3.9 3.9
Accumulated depreciation
At 31 July 2024 0.6 0.6
Charge for the year 0.3 0.3
At 31 July 2025 0.9 0.9
Carrying amount
At 31 July 2025 3.0 3.0
At 31 July 2024 1.8 1.8
127
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
NOTES TO THE PARENT COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 JULY 2025
CONTINUED
5 DEFERRED TAXATION ASSETS AND LIABILITIES
Deferred taxation is calculated in full using a tax rate of 25% (2024: 25%). The following are the principal categories of deferred
taxation assets and liabilities recognised by the Company and the movements thereon during the current and prior year.
Accelerated
tax
depreciation
£m
Share‑based
payment
timing
differences
£m
Total
£m
Deferred taxation liability/(asset) at 1 August 2023 0.3 0.3
Charged/(credited) to the income statement 0.1 (0.1)
Recognised through equity (0.4) (0.4)
Deferred taxation liability/(asset) at 31 July 2024 0.4 (0.5) (0.1)
Set‑off of tax (0.4) 0.4
Assets (0.1) (0.1)
Deferred taxation liability/(asset) at 1 August 2024 0.4 (0.5) (0.1)
Recognised through other comprehensive income 0.5 0.5
Deferred taxation liability/(asset) at 31 July 2025 0.4 0.4
Liabilities 0.4 0.4
As permitted by IAS 12, deferred taxation assets and liabilities are offset when there is a legally enforceable right to offset current
taxation assets against current taxation liabilities and when the deferred taxes relate to the same fiscal authority. The deferred
taxation assets disclosed above are deemed to be recoverable.
The majority of the deferred taxation balance is expected to reverse after more than twelve months.
6 INVENTORIES
2025
£m
2024
£m
Raw materials 12.4 10.7
Finished goods and goods for resale 7.9 7.6
20.3 18.3
Inventory write‑offs and inventory provisions netted from gross inventory were £0.3 million for the year to 31 July 2025
(2024:£0.7million).
128
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
7 TRADE AND OTHER RECEIVABLES
2025
£m
2024
£m
Trade receivables 25.7 16.5
Less: provision for impairment (0.7) (0.8)
Trade receivables – net 25.0 15.7
Corporation tax 0.5
Prepayments 1.6 0.7
26.6 16.9
Trade receivables are amounts due from customers for goods sold in the ordinary course of business. They are generally due
for settlement within 30 to 60 days for certain credit customers and therefore are all classified as current. Trade receivables are
non‑interest bearing. The fair value of trade and other receivables is equivalent to their carrying amount.
Under IFRS 9, the Group is required to utilise objective evidence as well as consider forward‑looking information and the
probability of default when calculating expected credit losses. The maturity of assets and history of write‑offs is therefore used
asan indicator as to the probability of default. Trade receivables are written off if they have been overdue for a number of years
orif a customer has entered into insolvency and there is no expectation of recovery.
The loss allowance as at 31 July 2025 and 31 July 2024 was determined as follows for trade receivables:
Current
£m
<30 days
£m
31‑60 days
£m
61+ days
£m
Total
£m
At 31 July 2024
Expected credit loss rate 5.0% 10.3% 29.1% 5.0%
Total gross carrying amount 9.6 3.6 1.7 1.6 16.5
Expected credit loss (0.2) (0.2) (0.4) (0.8)
Total 9.6 3.4 1.5 1.2 15.7
Current
£m
<30 days
£m
31‑60 days
£m
61+ days
£m
Total
£m
At 31 July 2025
Expected credit loss rate 6.0% 14.4% 12.8% 2.7%
Total gross carrying amount 19.0 2.8 1.0 2.9 25.7
Expected credit loss (0.2) (0.1) (0.4) (0.7)
Total 19.0 2.6 0.9 2.5 25.0
The other classes of receivables do not contain impaired assets.
8 INTERCOMPANY LOANS
Intercompany loans are repayable on demand and interest is charged at a rate of 2.0% above SONIA (Sterling Overnight Index
Average). Interest is calculated monthly. The balance at 31 July 2025 was £8.8 million (2024: £5.1 million). Management has
assessed the likelihood of the balance being repaid within the next year and has concluded that this is unlikely. As such, the
balance has been classed as non‑current.
9 CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS
2025
£m
2024
£m
Cash and cash equivalents 18.1 18.4
18.1 18.4
The fair value of cash and cash equivalents is equivalent to their carrying amount.
129
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
NOTES TO THE PARENT COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 JULY 2025
CONTINUED
10 TRADE AND OTHER PAYABLES
2025
£m
2024
£m
Trade payables 10.1 3.4
Amounts owed to Group undertakings 0.7
Social security and other taxes 0.3 0.2
VAT 0.5 0.6
Deferred income 0.2 0.1
Corporation tax 0.5
Accruals 4.8 4.8
16.4 9.8
Trade payables are non‑interest bearing and are normally settled monthly. The fair value of trade and other payables is equivalent
to their carrying amount.
11 LEASE LIABILITIES
Leasehold
property
£m
Total
£m
At 1 August 2023 2.0 2.0
Lease liability payments (0.3) (0.3)
Finance costs 0.1 0.1
At 31 July 2024 1.8 1.8
Addition – rent modification 1.5 1.5
Lease liability payments (0.3) (0.3)
At 31 July 2025 3.0 3.0
Lease liabilities are comprised of the following current and non‑current amounts:
2025
£m
2024
£m
Current
Amounts due within one year 0.6 0.3
Non‑current
Amounts due after more than one year 2.4 1.5
3.0 1.8
Lease liabilities are as follows:
2025
£m
2024
£m
Within one year 0.7 0.3
Later than one year and less than five years 2.6 1.4
After five years 0.3
Total including interest cash flows 3.3 2.0
Less: interest cash flows (0.3) (0.2)
Total principal cash flows 3.0 1.8
130
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
12 PROVISION FOR LIABILITIES
2025
£m
2024
£m
Non‑current
Provision for lease dilapidations 0.3 0.2
0.3 0.2
The Company recognises non‑current provisions for dilapidations totalling £0.3 million (2024: £0.2 million) in respect of leased
properties. Movement on the provisions for dilapidations has been recognised in the income statement.
13 SHARE CAPITAL
Allotted, called up and fully paid
2025
No. of shares
2024
No. of shares
Ordinary shares of £0.0002 each
Opening number of ordinary shares at 1 August
Sub‑division and re‑designation of shares 250,000,000
Closing number of ordinary shares at 31 July 250,000,000
A1 ordinary shares of £0.01 each
Opening number of A1 ordinary shares at 1 August 5,433 5,800
Bonus issue 2,711,067
Re‑designation of shares (2,716,500) (367)
Closing number of A1 ordinary shares at 31 July 5,433
A2 ordinary shares of £0.01 each
Opening number of A2 ordinary shares at 1 August 943 1,000
Bonus issue 470,557
Re‑designation of shares (471,500) (57)
Closing number of A2 ordinary shares at 31 July 943
B ordinary shares of £0.01 each
Opening number of B ordinary shares at 1 August 3,136 3,200
Bonus issue 1,564,864
Re‑designation of shares (1,568,000) (64)
Closing number of B ordinary shares at 31 July 3,136
D ordinary shares of £0.01 each
Opening number of D ordinary shares at 1 August 488
Bonus issue 243,512
Re‑designation of shares (244,000) 488
Closing number of D ordinary shares at 31 July 488
Closing number of shares 250,000,000 10,000
131
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
NOTES TO THE PARENT COMPANY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 JULY 2025
CONTINUED
13 SHARE CAPITAL CONTINUED
Allotted, called up and fully paid continued
2025
£
2024
£
Ordinary shares of £0.0002 each
Opening value of ordinary shares
Sub‑division and re‑designation of shares 50,000.00
Closing value of ordinary shares 50,000.00
A1 ordinary shares of £0.01 each
Opening value of A1 ordinary shares 54.33 58.00
Bonus issue 27,110.67
Re‑designation of shares (27,165.00) (3.67)
Closing value of A1 ordinary shares 54.33
A2 ordinary shares of £0.01 each
Opening value of A2 ordinary shares 9.43 10.00
Bonus issue 4,705.57
Re‑designation of shares (4,715.00) (0.57)
Closing value of A2 ordinary shares 9.43
B ordinary shares of £0.01 each
Opening value of B ordinary shares 31.36 32.00
Bonus issue 15,648.64
Re‑designation of shares (15,680.00) (0.64)
Closing value of B ordinary shares 31.36
D ordinary shares of £0.01 each
Opening value of D ordinary shares 4.88
Bonus issue 2,435.12
Re‑designation of shares (2,440.00) 4.88
Closing value of D ordinary shares 4.88
Closing value of share capital 50,000.00 100.00
There is a single class of ordinary shares in issue. There are no restrictions on dividends or the repayment of capital.
Shareholders are entitled to one voting right per share.
Re‑designation of shares
On 31 January 2024, 116 A1 ordinary shares, 20 A2 ordinary shares and 64 B ordinary shares were re‑designated into 200 D
ordinary shares of £0.01 each.
On 18 April 2024, 171 A1 ordinary shares and 29 A2 ordinary shares were re‑designated into 200 D shares of £0.01 each.
On6June 2024, 42 A1 ordinary shares and 8 A2 ordinary shares were re‑designated into 50 D ordinary shares of £0.01 each.
On 7 June 2024, 38 A1 ordinary shares were re‑designated into 38 D ordinary shares of £0.01 each.
On 24 September 2024, a shareholders’ resolution was passed in respect of a bonus issue of 4,990,000 new ordinary shares.
Asumof £49,900 was capitalised from the Company’s distributable reserves and appropriated to the shareholders of the
Company in proportion to the number of ordinary shares (A1, A2, B and D) in the Company held by them respectively. As a result
of the bonus issue,the total number of ordinary shares in issue increased to 5,000,000 and the resultant share capital increased to
£50,000. Thistransaction was required to facilitate the Company’s re‑registration as a PLC.
On 23 October 2024, immediately prior to the Company’s admission to the Main Market of the London Stock Exchange, each of the
2,716,500 A1 ordinary shares of £0.01 each, 471,500 A2 ordinary shares of £0.01 each, 1,568,000 B ordinary shares of £0.01 each
and 244,000 D ordinary shares of £0.01 each in the capital of the Company were sub‑divided and re‑designated as 250,000,000
ordinary shares of £0.0002 each in the capital of the Company.
132
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
14 EMPLOYEE BENEFIT EXPENSE
Staff costs (including Directors) are outlined below.
2025
£m
2024
£m
Wages and salaries 7.2 6.9
Social security costs 0.8 0.7
Share‑based payments 0.2
Other pension costs 0.1 0.1
8.1 7.9
The average monthly number of persons (including Directors) employed in the Company during the year was 196 (2024: 186).
15 RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS
The Company has taken advantage of the exemption included in IAS 24 Related Party Disclosures to not disclose details of
transactions with Group undertakings, on the grounds that it is the parent company of a Group whose financial statements are
publicly available.
Details of the Directors’ interests in the ordinary share capital of the Company are provided in the Directors’ report.
16 RETIREMENT BENEFIT PLANS
The Company operates a defined contribution retirement benefit plan for qualifying employees. The total expense recognised in
the income statement in the year ended 31 July 2025 was £0.1 million (2024: £0.1 million) and represents contributions payable to
the plan by the Group at rates specified in the rules of the plan. Amounts totalling less than £0.1 million were outstanding at the
balance sheet date (2024: less than £0.1 million).
17 EVENTS AFTER THE REPORTING PERIOD
There have been no material post balance sheet events that would require disclosure or adjustment to these financial statements.
133
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
ABE All Black Everything
APMs alternative performance measures
ARC Audit and Risk Committee
B2B business to business
BRC British Retail Consortium
CAGR compound annual growth rate
CODM Chief Operating Decision Maker
D2C direct to consumer
DDP delivered duty paid
DTR Disclosure Guidance and
Transparency Rules
EBITDA earnings before interest, taxes,
depreciation and amortisation
ECL expected credit losses
EHS environmental and health and safety
EPS earnings per share
FDA US Federal Drug Administration
FMCG fast‑moving consumer goods
FY24 the financial year from 1 August 2023 to
31July 2024
FY25 the financial year from 1 August 2024 to
31 July 2025
FY26 the financial year from 1 August 2025 to
31July 2026
GFC Group Financial Controller
GHG greenhouse gas
GMP Good Manufacturing Practice
H&S health and safety
HSE Health & Safety Executive
IBR incremental borrowing rate
IEA International Energy Agency
IFRS International Financial Reporting Standards
IPO initial public offering (on the London
StockExchange)
ISO 22000 International Organization for
Standardization certification for food
safetymanagement systems
JBP joint business plan
KPIs key performance indicators
MAR UK Market Abuse Regulation
NCI non‑controlling interest
NPD new product development
PWERM Probability‑Weighted Expected
ReturnMethod
R&D research and development
RCF revolving credit facility
RCPs Representative Concentration Pathways
RTD ready‑to‑drink
SBTi Science Based Targets initiative
SECR Streamlined Energy and Carbon Reporting
SID senior independent director
SKU stock keeping unit
SME Small‑Medium Enterprise
SSPs Shared Socioeconomic Pathways
TCFD Task Force on Climate‑related Financial
Disclosures
GLOSSARY
134
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
PROFESSIONAL ADVISERS
Company Secretary
One Advisory Limited
Joint brokers
Deutsche Numis
45 Gresham Street
London
EC2V 7BF
+44 (0) 207 260 1000
Goodbody
13th Floor
70 St. Mary Axe
London
EC3A 8BE
+44 (0) 203 841 6220
Financial PR
Alma Strategic
appliednutrition@almastrategic.com
Auditors
BDO LLP
55 Baker Street
London
W1U 7EU
Registrars
MUFG Corporate Markets
Central Square
29 Wellington Street
Leeds
LS1 4DL
Bankers
Royal Bank of Scotland plc
1 Spinningfields Square
Manchester
M3 3AP
Solicitors
Addleshaw Goddard LLP
One St Peter’s Square
Manchester
M2 3DE
135
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
STRATEGIC REPORT CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
ALTERNATIVE PERFORMANCE MEASURES
The financial information included in this document includes alternative performance measures (APMs) that are not recognised
under IFRS and are unaudited. The Directors believe that these non‑IFRS measures provide useful information with respect to the
performance of the Group’s business and operations. Prospective investors should not consider such non‑IFRS measures as an
alternative to the IFRS measures included in the financial statements.
Adjusted EBITDA
Adjusted EBITDA is calculated as the Group’s operating profit before interest, taxes, depreciation and amortisation and excludes
the impact of exceptional items, share‑based payments and significant non‑underlying items. A reconciliation is presented in note
6 of the Group financial statements.
Adjusted EBITDA margin
Adjusted EBITDA margin is calculated as the Group’s adjusted EBITDA (as defined above) expressed as a percentage of revenue
ofthe Group.
Adjusted basic and diluted earnings per share (EPS)
Adjusted basic and diluted EPS is calculated as adjusting the Group’s earnings per share for the impact of exceptional
items,share‑based payments and significant non‑underlying items, and also takes into account the taxation effect thereon.
Areconciliation is presented in note 11 of the Group financial statements.
Free cash flow
Free cash flow is calculated as the Group’s net cash from operating activities, less capital expenditure, plus/minus net interest,
less lease payments, adjusted for exceptional items, share‑based payments and significant non‑underlying items.
Free cash flow conversion
Free cash flow conversion is calculated as the Group’s free cash flow (as defined above) measured as a percentage of adjusted
profit after tax.
136
Applied Nutrition plc Annual Report 2025
The paper used in this report is produced using virgin wood fibre from
well‑managed, FSC
®
‑certified forests and other controlled sources. Allpulps
usedare elemental chlorine free and manufactured at a mill that has been awarded
the ISO 14001 and EMAS certificates for environmental management. The use of
the FSC
®
logo identifies products which contain wood from well‑managed forests
and other controlled sources certified in accordance with the rules of the Forest
Stewardship Council
®
.
Printed by an FSC
®
and ISO 14001 certified company.
Designed by
www.lyonsbennett.com
Applied Nutrition plc
Trio, Acornfield Road
Knowsley
Liverpool L33 7UG
0300 303 5344